Toshiba FS 2600 1 User Manual

TEC Electronic Cash Register  
FS-2600-1 SERIES  
Owner’s Manual  
S/A Operators Guide  
S/A Manager's Guide  
M/S Level Operator's Guide  
M/S Level Manager's Guide  
1. STAND-ALONE LEVEL  
OPERATOR’S GUIDE  
Table of Contents  
TOC 2  
EO1-11138  
FS-2600-1 SERIES  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Page  
1. INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................1-1  
1.1  
1.2  
Applicable Model .............................................................................................................1-1  
Accessories .....................................................................................................................1-1  
2. SPECIFICATION ..............................................................................................2-1  
2.1  
2.2  
ECR .................................................................................................................................2-1  
Hardware Option..............................................................................................................2-2  
3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE.........................................................3-1  
3.1  
3.2  
Front View........................................................................................................................3-1  
Rear View ........................................................................................................................3-2  
4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS ................................................4-1  
4.1  
4.2  
Mode Lock .......................................................................................................................4-1  
Mode Selector Keys.........................................................................................................4-1  
5. DISPLAY...........................................................................................................5-1  
5.1  
5.2  
Operator Display ..............................................................................................................5-1  
Customer Display ............................................................................................................5-3  
6. KEYBOARD......................................................................................................6-1  
6.1  
6.2  
Keyboard Layout..............................................................................................................6-1  
Functions of Each Key .....................................................................................................6-2  
7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION .............................................................7-1  
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS .................................8-1  
8.1  
8.2  
8.3  
8.4  
Code Entry Method ..........................................................................................................8-1  
Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys) ..................................................................................8-2  
Training Mode Start and End ...........................................................................................8-3  
“Cashier Exclusive” Option ..............................................................................................8-4  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES ...............................................................................9-1  
9.1  
9.2  
9.3  
9.4  
9.5  
9.6  
9.7  
Receipt-Issue/Non-issue Selection ..................................................................................9-2  
Store Message Display ....................................................................................................9-2  
No-sale ............................................................................................................................9-2  
Loan .................................................................................................................................9-3  
Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)..................................................9-4  
No-sale Exchange from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency ...................................9-4  
No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency ...................................9-5  
EO1-11138  
FS-2600-1 SERIES  
TOC 3  
TOC 1  
9.8  
9.9  
PLU (menu item) Entry through the Keyboard.................................................................9-5  
PLU (menu item) Entry through the Menu Window .........................................................9-6  
9.10 Repeat Entry ....................................................................................................................9-7  
9.11 Quantity Extension (Multiplication) ..................................................................................9-7  
9.12 Set Menu Entry ................................................................................................................9-8  
9.13 Modifier Entry...................................................................................................................9-9  
9.14 Other Income PLU Entry..................................................................................................9-9  
9.15 PLU Code Shift Entry.....................................................................................................9-10  
9.16 PLU Price Shift Entry .....................................................................................................9-10  
9.17 Combo (Combination) Sale Entry ..................................................................................9-11  
9.18 Scale Entry ....................................................................................................................9-11  
9.19 Subtotal Read ................................................................................................................9-12  
9.20 Tray Total Read .............................................................................................................9-13  
9.21 Item Correct ...................................................................................................................9-14  
9.22 Void (Designated Line Voiding and Returned Merchandise) .........................................9-14  
9.23 All Void...........................................................................................................................9-15  
9.24 Order Entry Control........................................................................................................9-15  
9.25 Order Entry Control with Table No.................................................................................9-17  
9.26 Temporary Release of Order Table No. Entry Compulsion ...........................................9-18  
9.27 Guest Check Merge .......................................................................................................9-18  
9.28 Guest Check Transfer....................................................................................................9-18  
9.29 Guest Check Split ..........................................................................................................9-19  
9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of a Sale) ...................................................9-20  
9.31 Charge Posting by Check Track ....................................................................................9-20  
9.32 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies ....................................................................................9-21  
9.33 Media Transfer...............................................................................................................9-21  
9.34 Tax Status Modification .................................................................................................9-22  
9.35 Automatic Tax Calculation .............................................................................................9-22  
9.36 Manual Tax Entry...........................................................................................................9-22  
9.37 Tax Exemption ...............................................................................................................9-23  
9.38 Listing Capacity Open....................................................................................................9-23  
9.39 Selective Itemizer (SI) Status Modification ....................................................................9-23  
9.40 Selective Itemizer (SI) Total Read .................................................................................9-23  
9.41 PLU Preset Price Read..................................................................................................9-24  
9.42 PLU Stock Read ............................................................................................................9-24  
9.43 Dollar Discount ..............................................................................................................9-25  
9.44 Percent Discount, Percent Charge ................................................................................9-25  
9.45 Non-add Number Print ...................................................................................................9-26  
9.46 Number-of-guests Entry.................................................................................................9-26  
9.47 Function Key Entry ........................................................................................................9-26  
9.48 Tip Paid..........................................................................................................................9-27  
9.49 Charge Tip .....................................................................................................................9-27  
9.50 Received-on-Account ....................................................................................................9-27  
TOC 2  
9.51 Paid-Out.........................................................................................................................9-28  
9.52 Print Mode Invert ...........................................................................................................9-28  
9.53 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Receipt Cut .....................................................................9-29  
9.54 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Message Print .................................................................9-30  
9.55 Guest Check Print..........................................................................................................9-30  
9.56 Check Print ....................................................................................................................9-31  
9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint) .......................................9-32  
9.58 Server Transfer ..............................................................................................................9-33  
9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out.........................................................................................9-34  
10. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................10-1  
10.1 Problems concerning the Power Supply ........................................................................10-1  
10.2 Problems concerning the Keyboard...............................................................................10-1  
10.3 Problems concerning the Drawer ..................................................................................10-2  
10.4 Problems concerning the Display ..................................................................................10-2  
10.5 Problems during Normal Operations .............................................................................10-2  
CAUTION:  
1. This manual may not be copied in whole or in part without prior written permission of  
TOSHIBA TEC.  
2. The contents of this manual may be changed without notification.  
3. Please refer to your local Authorized Service representative with regard to any queries  
you may have in this manual.  
EO1-11138  
1. TO OUR CUSTOMERS  
1. INTRODUCTION  
1. INTRODUCTION  
Thank you for choosing the TEC electronic cash register FS-2600-1 series. This owner’s manual provides a de-  
scription of the functions and handling of this register and should be read carefully to ensure optimum per-  
formance. Since every consideration has been given to safety and reliability, there is no danger of damaging the  
machine by incorrect operation.  
Please refer to this manual whenever you have any questions concerning the machine. This machine has been  
manufactured under strict quality control and should give you full satisfaction.  
Be sure to keep this manual for future reference.  
1.1  
Applicable Model  
FS-2600-1MD-US  
FS-2600-1MD-C-US  
The description of the model number is as follows.  
F S - 2 6 0 0 - 1 M D - C - U S  
Destination (Nation Code)  
(US, etc.)  
MCR (Magnetic Card Reader)  
Blank: Not provided  
C: Provided  
BIU (Back Indicator Unit for Customer)  
Blank: Not provided  
D: Provided (1 line)  
M/S Board for Master-Satellite System  
Blank: Not provided  
M: Provided  
1.2  
Accessories  
Owner’s Manual  
Control Key  
Double Sems Screw  
(EO1-11138; 1 pc.)  
(REG Key, MGR Key, MA Key,  
S Key; 2 pcs. respectively)  
(M-3x8; 1pc.)  
* Used to secure the Cable Blind Plate  
Refer to 3.2 Rear View (page 3-2).  
1-1  
EO1-11138  
2.1 ECR  
2. SPECIFICATION  
2. SPECIFICATION  
2.1  
ECR  
2.1.1  
Software Item  
Capacity of Department Memory  
Capacity of Group Memory  
Max. 99 departments  
Max. 30 groups  
Capacity of Major Group Memory  
Capacity of Cashier Memory  
Max. 10 major groups  
Max. 8 cashiers for the [CLK] key  
Using Standard Memory  
Max. 15 cashiers  
Using Expansion Memory  
Max. 99 cashiers  
Max. 200 employees  
Max. 5000 tables  
Capacity of Employee Memory  
Capacity of Customer File Table  
Capacity of PLU Memory  
Max. 200 employees  
Max. 5000 tables  
Without the option “Collecting the PLU data by each price level”  
Max. 1000 PLUs Max. 2500 PLUs  
With the option “Collecting the PLU data by each price level”  
Max. 500 PLUs Max. 1500 PLUs  
Max. 99 PLU groups  
Max. 6 digits; 0.00 to 9999.99  
Capacity of PLU Group Memory  
Unit Price Programmable  
2.2.1  
Hardware Item  
Size  
280 mm (width) x 442 mm (depth) x 235.6 mm (height)  
(or 475.5 mm (depth) and 129.5 mm (height) when the operator display  
is in its full opened position.)  
Weight  
4.0 kg  
Power Required  
Power Consumed  
Ambient Temperature  
Relative Humidity  
Interface Port  
117 V, 60 Hz (US)/240V, 50 Hz (AU)  
0.3 A (operating; US)/0.14 A (operating; AU)  
0 C to 40 C  
10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)  
COM 1 & 2, PC and M/S  
Memory Protection  
Long-lasting rechargeable lithium battery is provided.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
2-1  
EO1-11138  
2. SPECIFICATION  
2.2 Hardware Option  
2.2  
Hardware Option  
Option Name  
IF-2600RS  
Description  
Source  
The 3rd printer can be connected to the FS-2600 by  
installing this interface board.  
Contact your TOSHIBA  
TEC representative.  
KRAM-H-2600  
KRAM-1-2600  
KRAM-2-2600  
KRAM-4-2600  
KBD-2600-2  
Expansion memory of 0.5 MB  
Expansion memory of 1 MB  
Expansion memory of 2 MB  
Expansion memory of 4 MB  
2- line back indicator unit  
(16-digit dot display and 7-digit 7-segment display)  
KRD-2600-1  
KRD-2600-2  
1-line remote indicator unit (7-digit 7- segment display)  
2- line remote indicator unit  
(16-digit dot display and 7-digit 7-segment display)  
IF-1650C  
MD-6  
Interface board to connect a scale to the FS-2600  
A maximum of 2 remote drawers can be connected to the  
FS-2600 to realize the multi-drawer feature. Either the “multi-  
drawer feature controlled by a cashier” or “multi-drawer  
feature controlled by a currency” can be selected.  
2-2  
EO1-11138  
3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE  
3.1 Front View  
3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE  
3.1  
Front View  
Operator Display  
Navigation Key  
Keyboard  
MCR (Magnetic  
Card Reader)  
AC Cord  
Power Switch  
Power Switch ............ Insure that the power switch is in the OFF position before connecting AC power.  
you can adjust the display  
to the best viewing angle.  
Brightness Control  
CAUTION!  
1. Do not try to force the display beyond its full opened position.  
2. Do not press on or put any pressure on the MCR unit as it may be easily broken.  
3-1  
EO1-11138  
3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE  
3.2 Rear View  
3.2  
Rear View  
Customer Display  
Interface for Master-  
Satellite System  
Cable Blind Plate  
COM 1 Port  
Secure the Cable Blind Plate with the attached  
Double Sems Screw.  
Refer to 1.2 Accessories (page 1-1).  
A maximum of 2 drawers can be connected.  
A scale can be connected by installing the  
IF-1650C (Hardware Option)  
COM 2 Port  
PC Interface  
IF-2600 RS  
(COM 3 & COM 4;  
Hardware Option)  
The following printers can be connected to each port (COM 1 to COM 3; COM 4 is for future use).  
BRST-10 (Used for Receipt)  
TM-300 (Used for Receipt, Journal, RKP; Remote Kitchen Printer)  
TM-T88 (Used for Receipt, RKP; Remote Kitchen Printer)  
3-2  
EO1-11138  
4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS  
4.1 Mode Lock  
4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS  
4.1  
Mode Lock  
(POSITION)  
(FUNCTION)  
MGR  
X
REG  
SET ........... In this position, the register will allow  
programming operations.  
Z
........... (LOCK position) The register operations are  
locked when the Mode Lock is in this position.  
Meanwhile, the Display Message and the  
current time are displayed.  
SET  
REG  
Key  
REG ........... Normal cash register operations are carried  
out in this mode. However, the operations  
requiring a Manager Intervention cannot be  
performed in this mode.  
MGR  
Key  
X.............. The sale totals in memory can be read and  
the programmed data can be verified in this  
position.  
MGR........... This position allows to register all normal cash  
register operations to be carried out in the  
“REG” mode and the operations requiring a  
Manager Intervention.  
MA  
Key  
- .............. This is the “Negative Mode”, which  
automatically processes all the entries in the  
reverse way, i.e. positive items into negative,  
and the negative into positive. It is usually  
used to return or cancel all the items once  
purchased in a sale in the “REG” or “MGR”  
mode.  
Z .............. All the resettable totals and their respective  
counters in memory will be read and reset in  
this position.  
4.2  
Mode Selector Keys  
REG Key: The REG Key is used by the cashier or clerk who operates the register.  
MGR Key: The MGR Key is used by the store manager or a person authorized by the  
manager.  
MA Key:  
The MA Key is used by the store manager who will daily supervise the  
collection of money and the printout of transactions recorded by the register.  
This key is also used when programming the register.  
The keys may be inserted or pulled out at the “LOCK” or “REG” position.  
In the OPERATOR’S GUIDE, functions and operations will be described within the range of the Mode Lock  
positions of LOCK and REG using the REG key. Since operations requiring other positions and keys are  
controlled by the store manager, they are described in the MANAGER’S GUIDE.  
4-1  
EO1-11138  
5. DISPLAY  
5.1 Operator Display  
5. DISPLAY  
The FS-2600 is provided with the LCD operator display and the 7-segment customer display.  
5.1  
Operator Display  
5.1.1  
Basic Screen (common to all the mode lock positions)  
2
3
4
5
••••*••••  
10  
••••*••••  
20••••*••••  
30••••*••••  
40  
1
2
1
02-06-1999 03:04 Z9 1CLKendi  
1
2
6
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
A
B
9
C
8
8
9
8
9
8
9
8
0
••••*••••  
10  
••••*••••  
20••••*••••  
30••••*••••  
40  
Description of each Display Item  
Display Item  
Display Line  
1
Description  
Displays the current mode lock position. (7 digits)  
1 Mode Lock Position  
SET:  
:
SET  
*
*
REG:  
X:  
MGR:  
- :  
Z:  
BLIND:  
REG  
X/GTX  
REG  
REG-  
Z/GTZ  
SET  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
2 Date  
1
1
1
1
2
Displays the date. (10 digits)  
3 Time  
Displays the time. (5 digits)  
4 Cashier Code  
5 Cashier Name  
Displays the cashier code. (2 digits)  
Displays the cashier name. (12 characters)  
6 Terminal Status  
Displays the indicator which shows the terminal status. For  
details, refer to the next section “Description of each Indicator”.  
Indicator  
7 Display Area for each  
2 ~ 14  
15  
Refer to the display configuration for each mode position.  
Mode Position  
8 Navigation Key  
For details, refer to “Description of each Navigation Key” attached  
to the display configuration for each mode position.  
5-1  
EO1-11138  
5. DISPLAY  
5.1 Operator Display  
Description of each Display Item (continued)  
Display Item  
Display Line  
15  
Description  
9 Printer Error Indicator  
Displays the error indicator “X” to indicate that an error status has  
occurred on the printer which is connected to the terminal. From  
the left; Port 1, Port 2 and Port 3. The rightmost one will be used  
for the future.  
0 Print Data Reception  
15  
11  
Displays the indicator “” while the print data is being received  
from another terminal.  
Indicator  
A Sales Item Name  
Displays a sales item which has been just entered with a double-  
width sized character. (16 double-width sized characters) Also,  
displays an operation guidance message. (Max. 36 characters)  
Guidance Message  
B Quantity  
12  
12  
Displays a quantity with a double-width sized numeral.  
(max. 3-digit integral portion and 2-digit decimal portion)  
C Numeric  
Displays a numeric value entered and a sales total with a double-  
width sized numeral.  
Sales Total  
5.1.2  
Description of each Indicator  
••••*••••  
10  
••••*••••  
20••••*••••  
30••••*••••  
40  
1
2
1
2
1| || |||||||78  
2
3
4
5
6
Description of each Display Item  
Display Item  
Description  
1 For Future Use  
For Future Use (1 digit)  
2 Receipt ON/OFF Indicator  
3 RTR (Register-to-Register) Indicator  
4 Price Level Indicator  
Displays OFF while the receipt-issue mode is in “OFF”. (3 digits)  
Displays RTR while the RTR declaration is in ON. (3 digits)  
Displays the PLU price level currently selected. (2 digits)  
PRICE 1 (1st PRICE):  
PRICE 2 (2nd PRICE):  
PRICE 3 (3rd PRICE):  
PRICE 4 (4th PRICE):  
PRICE 5 (5th PRICE):  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
5 Menu Shift Level Indicator  
Displays the PLU menu shift level currently selected. (2 digits)  
MENU SHIFT 1:  
MENU SHIFT 2:  
MENU SHIFT 3:  
MENU SHIFT 4:  
MENU SHIFT 5:  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
6 Caps Lock and Double-width  
Displays the following during the programming operation  
including the character entries. (2 digits)  
Designation  
Small Letter/Normal Size:  
a
Capital Letter/Normal Size:  
Small Letter/Double-width Size:  
Capital Letter/Double-width Size:  
A
a
A
5-2  
EO1-11138  
5. DISPLAY  
5.2 Customer Display  
Description of each Display Item (continued)  
Display Item  
Description  
7 Previous Screen  
Displays the indicator “” when the menu has previous screens.  
(1 digit)  
8 Continuation Screen  
Displays the indicator “” when the menu has continuation  
screens. (1 digit)  
5.2  
Customer Display  
Upper Row  
(16-digit dot  
display;  
Hardware  
Option)  
AMOUNT  
TL  
Lower Row  
7-digit 7-  
segment  
ST  
CG  
display  
5-3  
EO1-11138  
6. KEYBOARD  
6.1 Keyboard Layout  
6. KEYBOARD  
The following is the standard keyboard layout, which was initially set at the factory. This register is designed to be  
capable of programming most of the keys at the desired locations or adding keys. For details of the keyboard  
layout change, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative.  
6.1  
Keyboard Layout  
VOID RECEIPT R/A  
ISSUE  
PO  
BREAK BREAK  
IN OUT  
TX1/M TX2/M TAKE EAT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
TIP  
IN  
POSITION  
#
SERVER CHG  
TRANS. TIP  
PAID  
CHECK CHECK SPLIT PRINT  
MERGE TRANS. CHECK CHECK  
ESC  
ENTER NEXT  
PAGE  
UP  
ALL  
ITEM OPEN PAGE  
VOID CORR  
#
DOWN  
NS  
C
START  
CHECK  
X
7
4
1
0
8
5
9
6
3
SERVER  
#
2
PLU  
00  
RECALL  
TOTAL  
ST  
AT/TL  
PLU Preset-code Keys  
Other Optional Key:  
[000] (Triple-zero Key)  
[CHECK]  
[Chg]  
[AMT]  
[SCALE]  
[TARE]  
[PRICE 1] to [PRICE 5]  
[PUB MODE]  
[END]  
[MISC]  
[CPN]  
[CREDIT 1] to [CREDIT 5]  
[%+] (%1)  
[SERVER #/RECEIPT]  
[CUR 1] to [CUR 5]  
[TRAY TL]  
[RECEIPT PRINT]  
[PICKUP BAL]  
[CODE OPEN]  
[DISPLAY]  
[RECEIPT]  
[%-] (%2)  
[DISC]  
[CLK 1] to [CLK 8]  
[CARD NO.]  
[CODE SHIFT 1] to  
[CODE SHIFT 5]  
[PR OPEN]  
[LC OPEN]  
[TAX]  
[READ]  
[RKP Msg 1] to [RKP Msg 10]  
[INVERT]  
[RKP]  
[TENDER UP]  
[COMBO]  
[TX3/M], [TX4/M]  
[EX]  
[MANUAL TARE]  
[RKP Msg #]  
[SELECT]  
[HOME]  
[SI1/M], [SI1/TL]  
[SI2/M], [SI2/TL]  
[RPT]  
[FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 20]  
[GUEST #]  
[MENU 1] to [MENU 5]  
[RECEIPT CUT]  
[LCD OFF]  
Additional [%-] Keys (%3 to %8)  
[RTR] (for Master-Satellite System)  
[STOCK]  
6-1  
EO1-11138  
6. KEYBOARD  
6.2 Functions of Each Key  
6.2  
Functions of Each Key  
P
 t
 .
 y
 n
 .
 k
 o
 y
 .
 o
 .
 s
 y
(SvcImiz)rtoTakeyl.  
S
 .
 t
 t
 y
 .
 e
 t
 e
 .
 n
  .
 t
 i
 e
PcntChargkey.  
6-2  
EO1-11138  
6. KEYBOARD  
6.2 Functions of Each Key  
N
t
h
 .
d
  e
t
 a
S
 e
a
 .
I
 .
 .
S
T
 .
 n
  y
ChargTipKey.  
(
 k
 .
 e
 .
 .
 .
 2
 v
 t
  .
  .
 .
 t
 .
 e
M
rTotalKey.  
6-3  
EO1-11138  
6. KEYBOARD  
6.2 Functions of Each Key  
T
 .
 K
  .
y
 y
 .
 e
T
 w
  y
  y
 A
 y
E
e
P
 e
SlctKey  
6-4  
EO1-11138  
7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION  
7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION  
7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION  
1. Unpack the accessories and the cash register from the carton.  
2. Place the cash register at a proper location, referring to the Safety Precautions at the beginning of the  
Operator’s Guide.  
3. Remove the tapes and seals for holding parts or protecting the cash registers surfaces.  
4. Plug the power cord plug into a wall outlet.  
5. Insert the REG key into the Control Lock, then turn it to the REG position.  
6. Before starting actual transaction entries on the cash register, ask your manager if you need additional setting  
or the initial programmed data needs to be changed. For programming, refer to the following chapters in the  
Manager’s Guide:  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION (page 5-1)  
6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA (page 6-1)  
7-1  
EO1-11138  
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS  
8.1 Code Entry Method  
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS  
The FS-2600 adopts one of the following cashier-identifying operations.  
CODE ENTRY METHOD, using the [SERVER #] key.  
CASHIER KEY METHOD, using [CLK] keys.  
8.1  
Code Entry Method  
Each cashier will sign-ON, sign-OFF, sign-IN, and sign-OUT through the [SERVER #] key.  
OPERATION: Mode Lock: REG (or, MGR or - with Manager Intervention)  
When you turn the Mode Lock to the REG (or MGR, - ), the following screen will appear on the LCD.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
P1S1  
Please input cashier code  
TOTAL  
0.00  
0.00  
DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5  
8.1.1  
Single-drawer Machines  
Sign-ON  
[SERVER #] ................ Cashier code and name are  
displayed and the sales transaction  
is allowed.  
2-digit manager-assign code  
(01 to 99)  
2-digit cashier’s own secret code  
(01 to 99)  
Sign-OUT  
Sign-IN  
9 [SERVER #] ............. Message “SIGN OUT” is displayed.  
[SERVER #] ................ Cashier code and name are  
(same as Sign-ON)  
displayed and the sales transaction  
is allowed.  
Sign-OFF  
0 [SERVER #] ............. Message “SIGN OFF” is displayed  
and no sales transaction is allowed.  
8-1  
EO1-11138  
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS  
8.2 Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys)  
Sign-ON..........to be operated to start the job.  
Sign-OUT........to be operated to leave the register for a while expecting to come back soon.  
Sign-IN............to be operated when the cashier comes back from a break declared by Sign-OUT.  
Sign-OFF ........to be operated to end the job.  
8.1.2  
Multi-drawer Machines  
Operations are basically the same as those for Single-drawer Machines, except that a one-digit drawer No. is  
entered through the [X] key prior to the Sign-ON entry:  
Sign-ON  
[X]  
[SERVER #]  
2-digit manager-assign code  
2-digit cashier’s own secret code  
1 or 2 as Drawer No.  
Entry of a drawer No. opens the designated drawer on finalizing the sale transaction. Designation of the drawer  
No. which is being used by another cashier causes an error.  
Sign-OUT  
Sign-IN  
Same as those for Single-drawer Machines.  
Sign-OFF  
NOTE: When the drawer No. entry and the [X] key depression are skipped in the sign-ON, the drawer 1 will be  
automatically assigned to the cashier, if the drawer 1 is not being used by another cashier.  
8.2  
Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys)  
When the [SERVER #] key is not installed, [CLK] keys ([CLK 1] to [CLK 8]; max. 8 keys) may be provided on  
the ECR keyboard.  
Sale entries will be possible only when one of the [CLK] keys is depressed (in REG, MGR, or - mode).  
When the same [CLK] key is again depressed, the cashier is in Cashier OFF status.  
NOTE: When a cashier key is set ON, the cashier name will be displayed in the LCD.  
8-2  
EO1-11138  
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS  
8.3 Training Mode Start and End  
8.3  
Training Mode Start and End  
This section describes the training function provided for newly employed cashiers. After entering the training  
mode, a cashier may operate the same transaction entries as those in the REG mode. The data in the Training  
Mode is processed into the training cashier memory, therefore it will not affect any actual sales data in business.  
CONDITION  
Outside a sale, and in Cashier Signed-OFF condition for CASHIER CODE ENTRY Method  
8.3.1  
Operation for Training Modes Start  
Code Entry Method  
[SERVER #] ............................................ The screen shown below appears on the LCD.  
2-digit manager-assign code of a cashier with Training status (01 to 99)  
2-digit cashier’s secret code (01 to 99)  
Cashier Key Method  
Set the Cashier Key programmed with Training status.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
TRAINING  
*
SIGN ON  
*
*
*
2CLBROWN  
0.00  
TOTAL  
0.00  
DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5  
8.3.2  
Entries in Training Mode  
A trainee can operate all the transaction entries described in the next chapter.  
except: 1) The drawer will not open.  
2) The Consecutive No. on the receipt will not be incremented.  
3) Training symbol is printed on the receipt and the guest check.  
4) Sales items entered in the Training Mode will not be printed on the journal.  
5) If the remote kitchen printer is connected, the sales items entered in the Training Mode will be  
printed on it with the training symbol.  
8.3.3  
Operation for Training Mode End  
Code Entry Method  
[SERVER #]  
0
Cashier Key Method  
Change the current Cashier Key to another.  
8-3  
EO1-11138  
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS  
8.4 “Cashier Exclusive” Option  
8.4  
“Cashier Exclusive” Option  
When the program option “Cashier Not exclusive” is selected:  
Every Cashier can access the other cashiers’guest order table accounts as well as his/her own.  
When the program option “Cashier Exclusive” is selected:  
Cashiers with the status “Own Tables only”  
The Cashier can only access the guest order tables from which he/she first takes orders or has reserved. An  
error results on attempting to access the other cashiers’ tables.  
Cashiers with the status “All Tables”  
The Cashier can access any order table besides those he/she reserves or takes orders from. In this case, the  
same is applied to the cashier as described for the program option “Cashier Not exclusive” selection above.  
NOTE: When the program option “Cashier Exclusive” is selected, even a cashier with the status “All Tables”  
cannot handle the order table which a cashier with Training status has opened.  
8-4  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
WARNING!  
When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.  
Condition Necessary to Start Transaction Entries  
Mode Lock:  
Insert the “REG” key and set it to the “REG” position.  
Cashier Sign-ON:  
If the [SERVER #] key is used for identifying a cashier, you must sign-ON or sign-IN.  
(See Section 8.1)  
If Cashier Keys are installed, you must set your cashier key to the ON status.  
(See Section 8.2)  
Description of each Navigation Key (REG, MGR, - )  
13  
14  
15  
13  
14  
15  
1
2
3
4
5
••••*••••  
10  
••••*••••  
20••••*••••  
30••••*••••  
40  
1) Except the case 2) below  
Display Item  
Description  
DISP1  
1 Navigation Key 1  
2 Navigation Key 2  
3 Navigation Key 3  
4 Navigation Key 4  
5 Navigation Key 5  
DISP2  
DISP3  
DISP4  
DISP5  
2) While the menu window is displayed  
Display Item  
Description  
1 Navigation Key 1  
2 Navigation Key 2  
3 Navigation Key 3  
4 Navigation Key 4  
5 Navigation Key 5  
Select  
Enter  
Pg dw  
9-1  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.1 Receipt-Issue/Non-issue Selection  
9.1  
Receipt-Issue/Non-issue Selection  
This operation determines whether or not the receipt is issued.  
Mode Lock may be in any position: Pressing the [SERVER #/RECEIPT] key without a prior numeric entry or  
pressing the [RECEIPT] key (whichever key is installed on the keyboard) will  
change the receipt ON/OFF status. Each time the key is pressed the receipt  
ON/OFF status is changed.  
NOTES:  
1. The “R OFF” status at the starting of a  
transaction entry decides whether a  
receipt will be issued for the transaction  
or not. Switching the Receipt ON/OFF  
status during a transaction will not be  
effective.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
OFF  
P1S1  
Receipt OFF  
Indicator  
2. If a transaction entered with the “R OFF”  
status and finalized but a receipt is  
required, the [RECEIPT ISSUE] (Post-  
issue Receipt) key can be operated to  
issue a receipt.  
RECEIPT OFF  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP3  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.2  
Store Message Display  
This operation designates and displays one of the 4 messages programmed to be displayed in the REG or MGR  
mode when the register is outside a sale. The message is displayed on the operator display and the dot display  
area in the customer display.  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
|Display Message Code| [NS]  
1 to 4  
(corresponding to Line No.  
1 to 4 in programming)  
NOTE: This operation is effective when the program options “Display Message Method 16 CHARACTERS  
HELD” and “Display Message DISPLAY in REG and MGR mode (as well as in LOCK mode)” are both  
selected.  
9.3  
No-sale  
The no-sale transaction is used to open the cash drawer without affecting any sales, such as for giving change,  
testing the receipt/journal print condition, etc.  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
[NS]...................... The drawer opens and a No-sale receipt is issued.  
9-2  
EO1-11138  
9.4 Loan  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
Max. 4 lines of Store  
Name/Message  
(REMARK 2 below)  
RESTAURANT  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
TEC  
Open 10:00am to 9:00pm  
Closed: every Wednesday  
Max. 3 lines of Commercial Message  
Date (Month-Day-Year order in  
this sample)  
Register No.  
02-06-1999 SAT  
#3001  
Day-of-Week  
No-sale Receipt Header  
Consecutive No.  
Current Time  
Max. 2 lines of Footer  
Logo Message (REMARK 1 below)  
NO SALE  
***  
**  
***  
**  
Name of the cashier who is  
operating the register.  
JONES  
0085 15:59TM  
Thank you  
Call again  
NOTES:  
1. A no-sale transaction after a non-add  
number print can be prohibited by the  
program option.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
NO SALE  
*
*
2. A no-sale transaction after an Order  
Table No. entry is not possible.  
REMARKS:  
1. When the program option “Footer  
Logo Message Print” is selected, a  
maximum of 2-line Footer Logo  
Message will be additionally printed  
on the receipt issued for the sales  
transaction without the Order Table  
No. entry.  
NO SALE  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
2. If your printer is the BRST-10 or the  
TM-T88, you can make and print  
your own logo on the Store Name/  
Message area.  
9.4  
Loan  
This operation is used to record the cash amounts loaned from the store as the change reserve in the drawer.  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
[R/A]  
|Cash Amount Loaned| [AT/TL]  
([ST])  
[AT/TL]  
To read the loan  
total so far entered.  
Repeatable to add up amounts.  
9-3  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.5 Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)  
NOTE: A loan transaction after an Order Table No.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
entry is not possible.  
START BANK  
*
*
CASH  
CASH  
CASH  
TOTAL  
20.00  
30.00  
50.00  
100.00  
TOTAL  
100.00  
100.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.5  
Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
|Check Amount to be Cashed| [CHECK]  
[NS] ........... The drawer opens to enable the exchange.  
Max. 8 digits 1 to 99999999  
NOTES:  
1. Other non-cash media keys may be used for this purpose if programmed to allow no-purchase  
cashing.  
2. A check cashing transaction after an Order Table No. entry is not possible.  
9.6  
No-sale Exchange from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
[CUR1]  
|Amount of Foreign Currency 1 to be exchanged| [NS]  
Max. 8 digits 1 to 99999999  
NOTES:  
1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate in  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
20.00  
the same way.  
CUR1  
2. The fraction process method is fixed to  
Round OFF.  
0.365  
CHANGE  
*
7.30  
CHANGE  
7.30  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9-4  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.7 No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency  
9.7  
No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency  
OPERATION  
|Amount of Domestic Currency to be exchanged| [CUR 1]  
NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate in the same way.  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
[NS]  
2. A program option allows you to prohibit the No-sale Exchange from domestic currency to foreign  
currency.  
3. The fraction process method is fixed to Round OFF.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
CATEND  
1.214  
CUR2  
20.00  
*
16.47  
CUR2  
16.47  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.8  
PLU (menu item) Entry through the Keyboard  
Each PLU is preprogrammed as the “PRESET” type (with a price preset) or “OPEN” type (with no price preset).  
Perform the operation depending on the type selected.  
OPERATION  
Open PLU Type  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
|Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT]  
Max. 7 digits  
1 to 9999999  
1
PLU000001  
1.00T  
T: Taxable  
Symbol  
|Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU  
Max. 7 digits  
1 to 9999999  
PLU000001  
1.00  
Preset PLU Type  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
1.15  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
|Preset-PLU Code| [PLU]  
[PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU  
Preset-price Open Entry through Preset PLU Type  
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT]  
Max. 7 digits  
1 to 9999999  
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key]  
Max. 7 digits  
1 to 9999999  
9-5  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.9 PLU (menu item) Entry through the Menu Window  
9.9  
PLU (menu item) Entry through the Menu Window  
This register allows you to select and enter a PLU (menu item) through the Menu Window.  
OPERATION  
Through the [DISPLAY] key  
[DISPLAY] ......................................................... Displays the corresponding menu table window as follows.  
([DISPLAY 1] to [DISPLAY 99])  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
PLU000001  
PLU000010  
PLU000100  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
Select Enter  
Pg dw  
Through the [PLU] key with the menu table  
programmed  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1.00T  
[PLU] .............. Displays the corresponding menu  
table window as follows.  
PLU000001  
PLU000010  
PLU000100  
P
1.00  
1
TOTAL  
Select Enter  
1.15  
Pg dw  
Function Keys while the Menu Window is displayed  
[] []:  
Cursor  
[SELECT]:  
PLU (menu item) Selection  
|Quantity| [SELECT] ([ENTER]): Quantity Selection  
[NEXT]:  
Screen Skip or Next Screen Request  
PLU (menu item) Selection and Entry  
[ENTER]:  
Operation Example 1)  
You select and enter the following item from the menu window shown above.  
PLU 000001 (1 item)  
[DISPLAY 1]  
([SELECT])  
[ENTER]  
Operation Example 2)  
You select and enter the following items from the menu window shown above.  
PLU 000010 (1 item), PLU 000100 (3 items)  
[DISPLAY 1]  
[]  
([SELECT])  
[ENTER]  
[]  
[3]  
[SELECT]  
[ENTER]  
Press once.  
Press twice.  
9-6  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.10 Repeat Entry  
NOTES:  
1. While the menu window is displayed, operate as follows to cancel a PLU (menu item) already  
selected by the [SELECT] key.  
[0] [SELECT]  
2. While the menu window is displayed, you cannot perform the following sales transactions.  
Subtotal Read  
Void  
Dollar Discount, % Operations  
9.10 Repeat Entry  
To repeat the same item of the last entry, simply depress the last key of the PLU entry sequence or depress the  
[RPT] key.  
OPERATION  
Open PLU Type  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
|Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT] [AMT] (or [RPT])  
1
1
1
PLU000004  
PLU000004  
PLU000004  
2.00T  
2.00T  
2.00T  
Max. 7 digits  
1 to 9999999  
|Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] [Same key] (or [RPT])  
Max. 7 digits  
1 to 9999999  
PLU000004  
3
2.00  
Preset PLU Type  
3
TOTAL  
DISP3  
7.32  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
|Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] [PLU] (or [RPT])  
[PLU Preset-Code Key] [Same key] (or [RPT])  
Preset-price Open Repeat  
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT] [RPT]  
Max. 7 digits  
1 to 9999999  
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] [RPT]  
Max. 7 digits  
1 to 9999999  
NOTES:  
1. If the first item of those repeated is modified with [SI/M] or [TX/M], the modified status will be  
effective through the last item of the repeated.  
2. Please note that the Preset-price Open Repeat can only be performed by the [RPT] key.  
3. A negative PLU item cannot be repeated.  
9.11 Quantity Extension (Multiplication)  
OPERATION  
Open PLU Type  
|Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Quantity| [X] |Price| [AMT]  
|Quantity| [X] |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Open-PLU  
Preset PLU Type  
|Quantity| [X] |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU]  
|Quantity| [X] [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU  
9-7  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.12 Set Menu Entry  
Preset-price Open Repeat  
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Quantity| [X] |Price| [AMT]  
|Quantity| [X] [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU  
NOTES:  
1. Quantity .................... Max. 3 integral + 3 decimal digits (Use the [ . ] key for entering decimal digits.)  
Price (Unit Price) ...... Max. 6 digits  
Product ..................... Must not exceed 8 digits.  
2. When the Quantity is 1-digit integer (1 to 9) followed by a Code-preset PLU key with a price  
preset, the [X] key is omissible.  
3. The product obtained by multiplication cannot be repeated.  
4. The decimal portion of the Quantity  
entry itself is processed down to the two  
digits below the decimal point. The  
fraction rounding in this case is fixed to  
ROUND OFF.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
3
PLU000004  
6.00T  
5. You can select the rounding process of  
the fractions of the product (result of  
multiplication) by a program option:  
ROUND OFF (initial setting), ROUND  
UP, or ROUND DOWN.  
PLU000004  
3
6.00  
3
TOTAL  
DISP3  
7.32  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.12 Set Menu Entry  
Up to 50 set menu tables are available. You can select two kinds of the set menu table; Preset Menu Type and  
Open Menu Type.  
OPERATION  
Preset Menu Table Type  
One Set Menu Entry  
PLU Entry of main menu  
Sub menu PLUs are automatically entered.  
Quantity Extension  
|Quantity| [X]  
PLU Entry of main menu  
Sub menu PLUs are automatically multiplied and  
entered.  
0.001 to 999.999  
Open Menu Table Type  
One Set Menu Entry  
PLU Entry of main menu  
PLU Entries of sub menus  
[END]  
Quantity Extension  
|Quantity| [X]  
PLU Entry of main menu  
PLU Entries of sub menus  
[END]  
0.001 to 999.999  
NOTES:  
1. Repeat Entry is not possible for the set  
menu items.  
2. Modifier Entry is not possible for the set  
menu items.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
10.00T  
1
1
1
PLU000005  
PLU000050  
PLU000500  
Main Menu  
Sub Menus  
3. Void Entry is not possible for the set  
menu items.  
4. As for the Preset Menu Table Type, up  
to seven menu items can be  
programmed to each table.  
PLU000005  
3
10.00  
10.70  
3
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9-8  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.13 Modifier Entry  
5. As for the Open Menu Table Type, if the quantity of sub menu items to be entered is  
programmed, the set menu entry is completed when the quantity of sub menu items reaches the  
programmed quantity. In this case, depressing the [END] key is unnecessary.  
6. As for the Open Menu Table Type, Quantity Extension is available for a sub menu PLU. Even  
when a main menu PLU is multiplied by the Quantity Extension, sub menu PLUs will not be  
multiplied.  
9.13 Modifier Entry  
You can select and enter “MODIFIER” PLUs (such as “PEPPER”, “RARE”, “MEDIUM” for grilling a steak item,  
and toppings for dishes, etc.).  
OPERATION  
If no modifier item is required.  
Entry of PLU  
Entry of PLU which is  
programmed for  
modifier use  
[END]  
(menu item) which it  
is allowed to enter  
the modifier items  
Up to 30 modifier PLUs can be entered.  
NOTES:  
1. The [END] key depression is omissible  
in the following cases and the modifier  
entry is automatically finalized.  
• Ordinary PLU item is entered after  
a modifier PLU.  
REG  
*
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
P1S1  
• The [TOTAL] key is operated after a  
modifier PLU.  
• Sale finalization by the media keys is  
performed after a modifier PLU.  
2. Quantity Extension is available for a  
modifier PLU. Multiplied sales item  
count is displayed for a modifier PLU.  
When a modifier PLU with preset price  
programmed is multiplied by the  
Quantity Extension, the preset price will  
also be multiplied.  
RARE  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
1
1
BEEF STEAK  
RARE  
PEPPER  
15.00  
BEEF STEAK  
3
15.00  
15.00  
3
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.14 Other Income PLU Entry  
This operation is used to enter items which do not directly become sales for the restaurant, such as postage, gift  
wrapping fee, utility (payment of electricity and gas), and donation.  
OPERATION  
The same key operation as “PLU (menu item) Entry”. However, use the PLU which has been linked to the  
Other Income Department.  
9-9  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.15 PLU Code Shift Entry  
9.15 PLU Code Shift Entry  
Depressing the [CODE SHIFT] key designates and enters a PLU item, adding the printed number (1 to 4) to an  
entered PLU code.  
OPERATION  
[CODE SHIFT 1]  
[CODE SHIFT 2]  
[CODE SHIFT 3]  
[CODE SHIFT 4]  
PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 1)  
PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 2)  
PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 3)  
PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 4)  
Example) When the PLU code 7 is designated after the [CODE SHIFT 2] is depressed, this sales transaction  
will result in the sales item entry of the PLU code 9.  
NOTES:  
1. Depressing the [C] key immediately  
after the [CODE SHIFT] key results in  
the cancellation of the PLU Code Shift  
Entry.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
2. You can depress the [CODE SHIFT]  
key any number of times before the PLU  
Entry. The last depressed [CODE  
SHIFT] key becomes effective.  
3. Function of the [CODE SHIFT] key is  
effective for the next PLU Entry only.  
CODE SHIFT2  
0.00  
TOTAL  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP3  
DISP4  
9.16 PLU Price Shift Entry  
Up to five different unit prices can be programmed for each PLU and you can select either of the following two  
features.  
9.16.1 Price Shift Entry “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature  
OPERATION  
(PLU entries)  
[PRICE 2]  
to  
PLU entry ....................... After the PLU Entry, the price  
mode automatically returns to  
[PRICE 5]  
the 1st price mode.  
with shifted price  
with the 1st price  
Price shift declaration  
9.16.2 Price Shift Entry “Keeping the shifted Price Level” Feature  
You can shift the PLU price level to another in the following three cases.  
Using the [PRICE] key  
The same key operation as “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature. However, the shifted price level is held  
until another [PRICE] key is depressed.  
Using the Hourly Range Designation  
Hourly range to start shifting each price level can be programmed. If programmed, the price level will be  
automatically shifted to another when the hourly range starts.  
Using the Price Level for each Customer  
Price level can be programmed to each customer. PLU entry will be performed on the basis of the  
programmed information. For details, refer to the section 9.31 Charge Posting by Check Track on page 9-20.  
9-10  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.17 Combo (Combination) Sale Entry  
NOTE: A program option allows you to prohibit  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
operating the [PRICE] key in the REG mode.  
PRICE SHIFT3  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.17 Combo (Combination) Sale Entry  
This operation is used to perform the special discount (%-, Dollar Discount, Free of Charge) to the PLU Entry on  
the basis of the Combo Table information. You can select either of the following two features.  
Manual Combo Sale Entry Feature  
Combo sale entry becomes effective and is performed only when you depress the [COMBO] key before the sale  
finalization.  
Automatic Combo Sale Entry Feature  
Combo sale entry is automatically performed when the sale transaction is finalized. To temporarily prohibit the  
combo sale entry, the use of the [COMBO] key is effective.  
OPERATION  
Depress the [COMBO] key any time before ........... When the combo sale entry is effective, the descriptor  
the sale finalization.  
“COMBO” is displayed on the operator display. When not  
effective, the descriptor disappears. The descriptor “DISC” is  
displayed when the special discount is performed.  
NOTE: In the combo sale entry, the 1st preset price  
programmed for each PLU is used. Also in this  
entry, only the preset-price PLUs can be used.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
COMBO DISC  
PLU000001  
PLU000008  
P1S1  
1.00T  
9.50T  
10.50  
-4.75  
5.75  
1
1
SUBTL  
COMBO DISC  
SUBTL  
TAX  
CASH  
0.82  
6.57  
CASH  
6.57  
6.57  
2
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.18 Scale Entry  
OPERATION  
(Scale entry is allowed only for the scale type PLUs)  
9.18.1 Automatic Scale Entry (without tare or by the tare automatic subtraction)  
Through Preset-PLU: Place the item on the scale platter.  
([SCALE])  
(M)  
|Preset PLU Code| [PLU]  
9-11  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.19 Subtotal Read  
Through Open-PLU: Place the item on the scale platter.  
([SCALE])  
(M)  
|Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Unit Price| [AMT]  
per Unit Weight  
NOTE: When the PLU is programmed with a Tare Table No., the tare weight is automatically subtracted from  
the scaled weight, and thus only the net weight is processed.  
9.18.2 Scale Entry by entering the Tare Table No.  
|Tare Table No.| [TARE]  
to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above two  
operations of the Automatic Scale Entry.  
1 to 9  
9.18.3 Scale Entry by manually entering the Tare Weight  
|Tare Weight| [MANUAL TARE]  
to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above two  
operations of the Automatic Scale Entry.  
Any value other than 0,  
however, less than the  
weight of scaled item  
9.18.4 Manual Scale Entry  
|Net Weight| of the item  
1 to 99999  
[SCALE]  
to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the  
above two operations of the Automatic Scale Entry.  
(unit: g or 1/100 LB. for example, enter 5 for 0.05LB.)  
9.18.5 Scale Entry for the Void Item  
[VOID]  
to be continued to the top of the “Manual Scale Entry” sequence above.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
SCALE  
0.999  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.19 Subtotal Read  
You can select one of the following three types of subtotal.  
9.19.1 Tax included Subtotal  
Depress the [ST] key any time during the sales transaction. The sales subtotal including tax will be displayed.  
9-12  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.20 Tray Total Read  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
1.00T  
1
PLU000001  
SUBTL  
1.10  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
1.10  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.19.2 Net Subtotal (tax not included)  
Depress the [ST] key any time during the sales transaction. The net sales subtotal (excluding tax) will be  
displayed.  
9.19.3 Eat-in/Takeout Subtotal  
Depress the [EAT IN] or the [TAKEOUT] key before the sale transaction is finalized. The register calculates and  
displays the subtotal according to the programmed Eat-in/Takeout tax status.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
PLU000015  
25.00T  
SUBTL  
CASH  
25.00  
25.00  
TAKE OUT  
*
*
CASH  
25.00  
25.00  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.20 Tray Total Read  
Depress the [TRAY TOTAL] key after entering PLU items. The contents of the tray total itemizer which include  
tax is displayed.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
1
TAX  
TRAY TL  
PLU000001  
PLU000010  
1.00T  
1.50  
0.25  
2.75  
TRAY TL  
2.75  
2
TOTAL  
DISP3  
2.75  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9-13  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.21 Item Correct  
9.21 Item Correct  
If you make an incorrect entry in the following sales transactions, depress the [ITEM CORR] key to delete the last  
entered item.  
OPERATION  
PLU ENTRY  
REPEAT ENTRY  
QUANTITY EXTENSION  
DOLLAR DISCOUNT  
PERCENT CHARGE/DISCOUNT  
RECEIVED-ON-ACCOUNT  
PAID-OUT  
[ITEM CORR]  
NOTES:  
1. When [ITEM CORR] is depressed after the Repeat Entry, only the last item of those repeated will  
be deleted.  
2. When [ITEM CORR] is depressed after the Quantity Extension entry, the entire product (result of  
multiplication) will be deleted.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
PLU000007  
12.00T  
CORR  
1
12.00  
14.04  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.22 Void (Designated Line Voiding and Returned Merchandise)  
This operation deletes a PLU item (not necessarily the last entered item) already entered in the sales transaction.  
It is also used outside a sale to return an item already purchased.  
OPERATION  
Void through the [PLU] key  
Depress the [VOID] key prior to or any time during the entry sequence of the following operations:  
PLU Entries (except Repeat Entry)  
Percent Discount/Charge on a PLU item  
Void through the Operator Display  
Depress the [VOID] key at any point.  
[]  
(|Quantity|)  
[ENTER]  
[]  
[PAGE UP]  
[PAGE DOWN]  
To delete the items by  
the Quantity Extension  
Select the item  
to be deleted.  
9-14  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.23 All Void  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
1
1
PLU000007  
PLU000008  
12.00T  
9.50T  
VOID  
1
*
*
PLU000007  
-12.00T  
PLU000007  
-12.00  
10.17  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.23 All Void  
When the current sales transaction now being entered must be canceled before the sale finalization, the All Void  
operation is effective.  
OPERATION  
[ITEM CORR] to execute ALL VOID  
Sale Item Entries  
[ALL VOID]  
[C] to cancel ALL VOID  
NOTE: You cannot perform the All Void if the sales  
items of 31 or more have already been entered  
in the sales transaction.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
1.00T  
1
1
1
1
1
PLU000001  
PLU000010  
PLU000100  
PLU000002  
PLU000020  
1.50T  
2.00T  
3.00T  
3.50T  
11.00  
SUBTL  
ALL VD  
*
*
ALL VD  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.24 Order Entry Control  
You can select either of the following two features.  
9.24.1 Order Entry Control (Order Table No. Manual Entry)  
OPERATION  
To start new order table:  
|Order Table No.| [START CHECK]  
[TOTAL] ................................... only to reserve order table  
1 to 999.9  
See (1)  
PLU (menu items) entries  
[TOTAL] ................................... to enter order items, with  
balance forward  
See (2)  
Sale finalization by.................... to enter order items, with  
the media keys  
payment of the check  
See (3)  
9-15  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.24 Order Entry Control  
To cancel the order table already reserved:  
|Order Table No. in reservation| [START CHECK]  
[AT/TL]  
See (4)  
To enter order items for the reserved order table, or to enter additional order items for the order table in use:  
|Order Table No. in reservation or in use| [START CHECK]  
PLU (menu items) entries  
See (5)  
9.24.2 Order Entry Control (Order Table No. Automatic Entry)  
OPERATION  
To start new order table:  
[START CHECK]  
PLU (menu items) entries  
[TOTAL]............... to enter order items,  
with balance forward  
See (2)  
Order Table No. is  
automatically created.  
Sale finalization.... to enter order items,  
by the media  
keys  
with payment of the  
check  
See (3)  
To enter additional order items for the order table No. in use:  
(|Order Table No. in use|) [RECALL]  
PLU (menu items) entries  
See (5)  
Omissible; NOTE 2 below  
NOTES:  
1. You cannot perform the following sales transactions after entering the order table No.  
• No-sale, Received-on-Account, Paid Out  
• Negative PLU Entry  
• All Void  
• Tray Total Read  
• Percent Charge/Discount and Dollar Discount on PLU item  
2. Entry of the order table No. before depressing the [RECALL] key is omissible. In this case, the  
oldest-recorded order table No. among all of the opened order tables will be read out.  
(1)  
(2)  
REG  
TABLE NO  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
*
*
001  
P1S1  
TABLE NO  
PLU000001  
PLU000010  
001  
P1S1  
1.00T  
10.00T  
1
1
RESERVATION001  
NEW BALANCE001  
0.00  
11.90  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
2
TOTAL  
DISP3  
11.90  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9-16  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.25 Order Entry Control with Table No.  
(3)  
(4)  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
REG  
TABLE NO  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
*
*
TABLE NO  
PLU000001  
PLU000010  
001  
P1S1  
1.00T  
001  
P1S1  
1
1
10.00T  
11.00  
SUBTL  
TAX  
CASH  
0.90  
11.90  
CASH  
CANCEL  
001  
11.90  
11.90  
0.00  
2
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
(5)  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
TABLE NO  
PLU000001  
PLU000010  
001  
P1S1  
1.00T  
1
1
10.00T  
SUBTL  
11.90  
11.90  
2
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.25 Order Entry Control with Table No.  
OPERATION  
Enter the Table No. and depress the  
[POSITION #] at either point.  
|Table No.| [POSITION #]  
1 to 999.9  
(|Order Table No.| [START CHECK])  
PLU (menu items) entries  
Sale finalization by the  
media keys  
1 to 999.9  
Omissible if unnecessary  
REG  
2’ nd NO.  
1
SUBTL  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
005  
P1S1  
10.00T  
10.00  
PLU000010  
TAX  
CASH  
0.80  
10.80  
CASH  
10.80  
10.80  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9-17  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.26 Temporary Release of Order Table No. Entry Compulsion  
9.26 Temporary Release of Order Table No. Entry Compulsion  
This operation releases one sales transaction from the compulsory status of the order table No. entry. It is  
effective only when the program option “Compulsion of the Order Table No. Entry” has been programmed.  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
PLU (menu items) Entries  
[PUB MODE]  
NOTE: After finalizing the sale, the status of the Order  
Table No. entry compulsion is automatically  
resumed.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
Non TAB  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.27 Guest Check Merge  
Two different guest check accounts can be merged together.  
OPERATION  
|Order Table No.| [CHECK MERGE]  
|Order Table No.|  
[CHECK MERGE]  
[C] to cancel  
Enter the order table No. of which  
account is transferred to another.  
Enter the order table  
No. of the destination.  
NOTES:  
1. This operation is available only to the  
opened order table account. Entry of  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
TABLE NO  
MERGE  
INTO  
002  
P1S1  
1
2
unopened or reserved order table No.  
causes an error.  
2. If the item buffers of the two order tables  
to be merged exceed 100, this operation  
will result in an error.  
NEW BALANCE002  
22.52  
4
TOTAL  
DISP3  
22.52  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.28 Guest Check Transfer  
Guest check account can be transferred to another of the order table not in use.  
OPERATION  
|Order Table No.| [CHECK TRANS.]  
|Order Table No.|  
[CHECK TRANS.]  
[C] to cancel  
Old Order Table No.  
New Order Table No.  
9-18  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.29 Guest Check Split  
NOTES:  
1. As for the old order table, you can use  
REG  
TABLE NO  
TRANSFER  
INTO  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
002  
P1S1  
reserved or opened one. As for the new  
order table, you can use reserved or  
unopened one.  
1
2
2. When the register adopts the feature  
“Order Entry Control by automatic entry  
of the Order Table No.”, you cannot  
enter the new order table No. and it will  
be automatically designated.  
TABLE TRANS002  
43.20  
4
TOTAL  
DISP3  
43.20  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.29 Guest Check Split  
Guest check account can be partially transferred to another of the order table not in use.  
OPERATION  
|Order Table No.| [SPLIT CHECK]  
|Order Table No.| [SPLIT CHECK]  
PLU (menu item)  
Entries (NOTE 1  
below)  
Enter the order table No. of  
which account is partially  
transferred to another.  
Enter the order table  
No. of the destination.  
[C] to cancel  
[TOTAL]  
NOTES:  
1. You can only enter the sales items which have been stored in the item buffer of the order table of  
which account is transferred.  
2. When the register adopts the feature “Order Entry Control by automatic entry of the Order Table  
No.”, you cannot enter the order table No. of the destination and it will be automatically  
designated.  
3. After the PLU entries, you can check the contents of the two order tables using the [] and []  
keys.  
If a guest wants to pay the check partially or entirely.....  
|Order Table No.| [SPLIT CHECK]  
PLU (menu item) Entries  
[]  
Sale finalization by the  
media keys  
Enter the order table  
No. of which account is  
partially or entirely paid.  
REG  
TABLE NO  
SPLIT  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
001  
P1S1  
1
2
4
PLU000010  
40.00T  
NEW BALANCE002  
43.20  
4
TOTAL  
DISP3  
43.20  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9-19  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of a Sale)  
9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of a Sale)  
OPERATION  
Paid in One Media:  
Totalling (no change calculation)  
[Media]  
Tendering (with change calculation)  
|Amount Tendered| [Media]  
Paid by Credit Card:  
|Code for Credit Card Company| [CARD No.]  
1 to 12  
|Order Table No.| [START CHECK]  
|Order Table No.| [RECALL]  
PLU (menu item) Entries  
- - -  
- - -  
(|Amount Tendered|) [Chg]  
Multi-tender (Short-tender repeated by the same media):  
|1st Amount Tendered| [Media]  
|2nd Amount Tendered| [Same Media]  
(|Last Amount Tendered|) [Same Media]  
Split-tender (Short-tender repeated by different medias):  
|Check Amount Tendered Portion| [CHECK]  
|Media-Coupon Amount Tendered Portion| [CPN]  
(|Cash Amount Tendered Portion|) [AT/TL]  
NOTE: If the [TENDER UP] key is installed on the  
keyboard, the cash tendering operation  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
SUBTL  
TOTAL  
CATEND  
CHANGE  
PLU000010  
7.00T  
corresponding to the sales total will be  
automatically performed by depressing its key.  
7.00  
7.00  
10.00  
3.00  
Example)  
The following value is  
programmed to the Tender Up  
table:  
$5.00, $10.00 and $20.00  
CHANGE  
3.00  
7.00  
When you depress the [TENDER UP] key for  
the sale total $7.00, the cash tendering  
operation by $10.00 will be automatically  
performed.  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.31 Charge Posting by Check Track  
This operation is used for the charge posting, and the entry of customer code reads out the customer account  
balance.  
OPERATION  
|Customer Code| [PICKUP BAL]  
Code already opened  
PLU (menu item) Entries  
[CREDIT 5]  
|New Customer Code| [CODE OPEN]  
Max. 12 digits Code not yet opened  
Customer Card reading through the MCR  
9-20  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.32 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies  
NOTE: If the PLU price level is programmed to each  
customer, the PLU (menu item) entry will be  
fixedly performed by the corresponding price  
level. In this case, using the [PRICE] key to  
change the level causes an error, and also the  
hourly range price level is ignored if  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
No999999999999  
Customer  
Code  
SMITH  
100.00  
programmed.  
SMITH  
100.00  
100.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.32 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies  
OPERATION  
[ST]  
[CUR1]  
Amount Tendered in [CUR1]  
[AT/TL]  
Foreign Currency  
|
Mandatory for  
a sale paid in  
foreign  
Displays the  
equivalent value  
in Foreign  
Other media keys may  
be used if paid in that  
media. (The media  
key must be  
programmed to allow  
tendering in this case.)  
Displays the  
domestic  
currency value  
equivalent to the  
tendered foreign  
currency.  
Display the entered  
foreign currency  
amount.  
currencies.  
Currency 1.  
NOTES:  
1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate  
the same as [CUR 1], except that each  
of these keys has its own exchange rate  
programmed corresponding to each  
foreign currency.  
2. Multi-tendering with the same foreign  
currency or Split-tendering with other  
medias or foreign currencies are  
possible.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
SUBTL  
TAX  
TOTAL  
CUR1  
20.00  
1.60  
21.60  
100.00  
0.365  
*
CATEND  
CHANGE  
36.50  
14.90  
CHANGE  
14.90  
21.60  
3. The foreign currency keys cannot be  
used to finalize Received-on-Account  
payments, or Paid-out items.  
2
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
4. When a tendering by a foreign currency occurs after a short-tendered condition, the [ST] key will  
not be mandatory.  
5. A sale of zero or negative balance cannot be finalized using any of the foreign currency keys.  
9.33 Media Transfer  
This operation is used to change a media already paid and finalized into a different one.  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
|Amount| [Source Media]  
Enter the amount  
[Destination Media]  
of the media to be  
transferred.  
Depress the media  
key of the destination.  
[C]  
9-21  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.34 Tax Status Modification  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
CHANGE  
*
CHANGE  
INTO  
*
CPN  
CASH  
10.00  
CASH  
10.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.34 Tax Status Modification  
Tax status of the PLU or required key is reversed:  
OPERATION  
Depress the [TX1/M] to [TX4/M] of which tax status is to be modified prior to or any time (before the final key  
at the latest) during the entry sequence of the following operations. More than one modifier key can be  
depressed for the same item entry:  
PLU Entries  
Percent Discount/Charge  
Dollar Discount  
NOTE: If the inclusive-tax feature is selected to the [TX3/M] and [TX4/M] keys, the tax status modification  
using those keys is not allowed.  
9.35 Automatic Tax Calculation  
When the tax table (or tax rate) and the tax status of each PLU have been programmed for the register, the tax  
calculation is automatically performed on any taxable PLU item.  
9.36 Manual Tax Entry  
The register allows you to manually enter the tax after the PLU entries.  
OPERATION  
|Irregular Tax Amount to be Added| [TAX]  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
PLU000001  
1.00T  
TAX5  
0.12  
TAX5  
0.12  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
1.12  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9-22  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.37 Tax Exemption  
9.37 Tax Exemption  
OPERATION  
Selective Tax Exemption  
Examples) [TX1/M] [EX]  
Sale Finalization ........to exempt Tax 1 from the sale  
Sale Finalization ........to exempt Tax 1 & Tax 2 from  
the sale  
Sale Finalization ........to exempt Tax 1, Tax 2 and Tax  
3 from the sale  
[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [EX]  
[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [TX3/M] [EX]  
All Tax Exemption  
[EX]  
Sale Finalization  
Sale Finalization  
to exempt all the  
taxes from the sale  
[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [TX3/M] [TX4/M] [EX]  
NOTE: If the inclusive-tax feature is selected to the  
[TX3/M] and [TX4/M] keys, the tax exemption  
of Tax 3 and Tax 4 is not allowed.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
1
TAX2EX  
PLU000010  
10.00T  
10.00  
TOTAL  
10.00  
10.00  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.38 Listing Capacity Open  
For Departments and PLUs  
Depress the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key prior to or any time during the PLU entry (including REPEAT and  
QUANTITY EXTENSION entries). Please note that the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key must be pressed, at the latest,  
before the final key of the entry sequence. The High Amount Limit for the PLU will be extended with two higher  
digits, and the Low Amount Limit will be extended with one lower digit. For entering an amount still exceeding  
these limits, you must call for Manager Intervention.  
For Media Tender Amounts  
Depress the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key before or after the tender amount entry. The High Amount Limit for the  
media tendering will be extended with one higher digit. For entering an amount still exceeding this limit, you must  
call for Manager Intervention.  
9.39 Selective Itemizer (SI) Status Modification  
Depress the [SI/M] ([SI1/M], [SI2/M]) key for entering the required PLU item, the same way as [LC OPEN] is  
operated. The SI-net status is reversed to non-net status, and vice versa.  
9.40 Selective Itemizer (SI) Total Read  
Depressing the [SI/TL] key during the sales transaction displays the selective itemizer total calculated.  
OPERATION  
PLU (menu item) Entry  
[SI/TL]  
([SI1/TL], [SI/2/TL])  
9-23  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.41 PLU Preset Price Read  
NOTE: Selective Itemizer Total Read after the order  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
7.50TS  
-0.75  
table No. entry is possible.  
1
SI1 TL  
PLU000030  
S: SI-net  
Symbol  
SI1 TL  
-0.75  
8.10  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.41 PLU Preset Price Read  
You can check the preset price of each PLU.  
OPERATION  
[READ]  
(Any time inside or outside a sale, but prohibited during a short-tendered condition.)  
([PRICE])  
|PLU Code| [PLU]  
for the shift of price level  
[READ]  
([PRICE])  
[PLU Preset-Code Key]  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
for the shift of  
price level  
([MENU])  
for the shift of keyboard phase  
READ PLU000030  
7.50  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.42 PLU Stock Read  
You can check the current stock of each PLU.  
OPERATION  
[STOCK] |PLU Code| [PLU]  
[STOCK] ([MENU])  
(Any time inside or outside a sale, but prohibited during a short-tendered condition.)  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
[PLU Preset-Code Key]  
for the shift of keyboard phase  
STOCK PLU000030  
120.  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9-24  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.43 Dollar Discount  
9.43 Dollar Discount  
OPERATION  
PLU item entry  
(for discount from an individual item)  
|Amount| [DISC]  
Max. 7 digits  
1 to 9999999  
[ST]  
(for discount from the sale total)  
NOTES:  
1. Discount from the sale total  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
10.00T  
An amount exceeding the sale total  
cannot be entered without the “Credit  
Balance” option. However, the  
amount exceeding the sale total  
cannot be entered even with the  
“Credit Balance” option when the  
sales transaction includes the order  
table No. entry.  
1
DISC  
PLU000010  
-0.10  
DISC  
-0.10  
10.70  
After the Dollar Discount entry,  
additional item entry cannot be  
performed.  
Dollar Discount can be performed  
only once in a sale.  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
2. Discount from an individual item  
Dollar Discount can be performed only when the sales transaction does not include the order  
table No. entry.  
9.44 Percent Discount, Percent Charge  
OPERATION  
PLU entry  
[%-] (or [%+]) (% operation by the preset rate)  
[ST]  
|Rate| [%-] (or [%+]) (% operation by the manual rate)  
0.001 to 99.999  
NOTES:  
1. You can perform the manual rate %  
operation by manually entering a % rate  
even when the preset rate has been  
programmed on the [%] key.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
PLU000010  
10.00T  
%-  
5%  
-0.50  
2. % operation for the sale total  
After the % operation, additional item  
entry cannot be performed.  
% operation can be performed only  
once in a sale.  
%-  
-0.50  
10.30  
3. % operation for an individual item  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
% operation can be performed only  
when the sales transaction does not  
include the order table No. entry.  
9-25  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.45 Non-add Number Print  
9.45 Non-add Number Print  
Non-add numbers can be entered for future reference, to indicate guest code, media checks, credit cards, etc.  
The entered numbers do not affect any sale total data.  
OPERATION  
(allowed any time during a sale or transaction)  
|Number| [#]  
Max. 18 digits  
NOTES:  
1. A program option allows you to prohibit  
operating the No-sale transaction after  
entering a non-add number.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
#123000  
2. Non-add number print immediately after  
entering the order table No. is not  
possible.  
#
1230.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.46 Number-of-guests Entry  
Number of the guests of sale can be entered.  
OPERATION  
(allowed any time during a sale or transaction)  
|Number of Guests| [GUEST #]  
Max. 3 digits  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
GUEST  
PLU000010  
10.00T  
2CU  
NOTE: When you enter the number of the guests  
more than once, the last entered number will  
be effective.  
GUEST  
0.02  
10.80  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.47 Function Key Entry  
Once you depress the [FUNCTION] key, the programmed key operation sequence is automatically performed.  
OPERATION  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
1
SUBTL  
%-  
PLU000001  
PLU000020  
1.00T  
8.50T  
9.50  
[FUNCTION]  
5%  
-0.48  
[FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 20]  
Example) Key operation sequence shown below has  
been previously programmed on the  
[FUNCTION 1] key:  
SUBTL  
10.65  
10.65  
2
TOTAL  
DISP3  
[1] [PLU] [2] [0] [PLU] [ST] [5] [%-]  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9-26  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.48 Tip Paid  
9.48 Tip Paid  
When a guest pays the tip by credit card, this operation can divide the tip and pay it to each cashier in cash.  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
REG  
2CL  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
2
P1S1  
TIP PAID  
CASH  
|Cashier Code| [TIP PAID]  
|Tip Amount|  
Max. 7 digits  
[AT/TL]  
10.00  
CASH  
10.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.49 Charge Tip  
OPERATION  
(|Order Table No.| [START CHECK])  
PLU (menu item) Entry  
|Tip Amount| [CHARGE TIP]  
Max. 7 digits  
Payment Entry using the media as the tip.  
NOTE: You cannot use the [AT/TL] key for the first  
tender operation after depressing the  
[CHARGE TIP] key.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
CHG TIP  
PLU000010  
10.00T  
0.50  
CHG TIP  
0.50  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
11.30  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.50 Received-on-Account  
A received-on-account transaction is used to identify money which is in the drawer but not from the daily  
business.  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
([ST])  
|Amount of Payment| [R/A]  
|Cash Amount Tendered| [AT/TL]  
Max. 7 digits  
(if paid in cash)  
(|Quantity| [X])  
Repeatable if multiple amounts are received.  
|Check Amount Tendered| [CHECK]  
(if paid in check)  
[Chg] (if processed into general charge account)  
Other Media Finalization  
9-27  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.51 Paid-Out  
NOTES:  
1. The media keys used for this operation  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
must be programmed to allow received-  
on-account entries.  
2. A received-on-account transaction after  
an order table No. entry is not possible.  
R/A  
R/A  
SUBTL  
CASH  
5.00  
10.00  
15.00  
15.00  
CASH  
15.00  
15.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.51 Paid-Out  
A paid-out transaction is used when money is removed from the drawer without totaling to a sale.  
OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)  
|Amount to be paid out| [PO] ([ST])  
[AT/TL]  
Max. 7 digits  
Repeatable if multiple amounts are paid out.  
NOTES:  
1. Only the [AT/TL] key can finalize a paid-  
out transaction (i.e. must be paid out in  
cash).  
2. A paid-out transaction after an order  
table No. entry is not possible.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
10.00  
10.00  
PO  
SUBTL  
TOTAL  
10.00  
TOTAL  
10.00  
10.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.52 Print Mode Invert  
When the option “Single/Double Print” is selected for the RKP (remote kitchen printer) receipt, the [INVERT] key  
operation can temporarily change the print mode to “Itemized Print”.  
OPERATION  
Pattern 1: To enter all the PLU items in the itemized mode  
[INVERT]  
PLU entries  
[TOTAL] (only when the sales transaction has been started  
with an order table No. entry) or Sale finalization by the media  
keys  
9-28  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.53 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Receipt Cut  
Pattern 2: To enter only the designated PLU items in the itemized mode  
PLU entries  
[INVERT]  
PLU entries  
[INVERT]  
Issues an Itemized receipt for all the items entered here.  
Issues a Single/  
Double receipt for  
each item entry.  
(PLU entries)  
[TOTAL] (only when the sales transaction has  
been started with an order table No. entry) or  
Sale finalization by the media keys  
Issues a Single/  
Double receipt for  
each item entry.  
NOTES:  
1. When the option “Itemized Print” is  
selected, the Print Mode Invert  
operation is not possible.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
2. The Itemized Print Mode once declared  
by the [INVERT] key is automatically  
cancelled by a finalizing operation (by  
[TOTAL] or media keys).  
0.00  
0.00  
INV  
DISP1  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
Invert  
Indicator  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
9.53 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Receipt Cut  
This operation issues an RKP (remote kitchen printer) receipt while the print mode is in the “itemized print”.  
OPERATION  
([INVERT]  
) PLU entries  
[RKP CUT] ...................................... An RKP receipt is issued.  
Necessary for the  
“Single/Double  
Print” option  
PLU data is stored  
in the RKP printer  
buffer.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
PLU000001  
1.00T  
RKP CUT  
0.00  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
1.10  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9-29  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.54 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Message Print  
9.54 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Message Print  
This operation prints a message on the RKP.  
OPERATION  
RKP Print  
[RKP Msg]  
([RKP Msg 1] to [RKP Msg 10])  
|Message No.| [RKP Msg #]  
1 to 20  
11-23-1999 TUE  
#0  
20 RKP MESSAGES ARE  
PROGRAMMABLE!  
1CL  
0209 16:30TM  
This operation is possible during a sales transaction.  
ex.) PLU Entry [RKP Msg] PLU Entry  
NOTES:  
1. A message programmed in the RKP  
Message Table is printed on the RKP.  
No print occurs on receipt.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
20 RKP MESSAGES ARE  
PROGRAMMABLE!  
2. A message output to the RKP consists  
of double-sized characters.  
RKP Msg  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.55 Guest Check Print  
A guest check print is required when a sales transaction with an order table No. entry has been finalized by the  
media keys (for payment).  
OPERATION  
Case 1: When the option “Guest check is printed on the receipt roll paper” has been selected:  
When a sales transaction is finalized by the media keys (for payment), a guest check will be  
automatically issued from the receipt.  
9-30  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.56 Check Print  
Case 2: When the option “Guest check is printed on the slip” has been selected:  
When a sale transaction is finalized by the media keys.  
A slip has already been placed  
on the slip table of the BRST-10  
and the “SLIP” lamp on the  
BRST-10 is illuminated.  
A slip has not been placed on the slip table yet.  
A guest check print is automatically started.  
A guidance message “Please set paper.” is displayed  
on the operator display.  
When you want to  
print a guest check  
on a slip.  
When you want to  
print a guest check  
on the receipt roll  
paper.  
Insert a slip into the  
Depress the  
slip slot to illuminate  
the “SLIP” lamp, and  
a guest check print is  
automatically started.  
[RECEIPT PRINT]  
key.  
NOTE: If a guest check print requires two slips or more, the “SLIP” lamp starts to blink after auto-ejecting a slip  
which has just been printed. In this case, insert a new slip and the guest check print is automatically  
restarted.  
Guest Check Receipt  
Guest Check Slip  
TABLE NO  
1
11-24-1999 WED #0  
TABLE NO  
1
11-24-1999 WED #0  
1
1
PLU000010  
PLU000020  
10.00T  
8.50T  
1
1
PLU000010  
PLU000020  
10.00T  
8.50T  
SUBTL  
TAX  
CASH  
18.50  
2.33  
20.83  
SUBTL  
TAX  
CASH  
18.50  
2.33  
20.83  
1CL  
0276 12:52TM  
1CL  
0280  
12:53TM  
9.56 Check Print  
You can issue a presentation for a sale transaction which has been temporarily finalized by the [TOTAL] key.  
OPERATION  
|Table No.| [PRINT CHECK]  
1 to 999.9  
When your receipt printer is the TM-T88 or the TM-300, a  
presentation print is automatically started.  
When your receipt printer is the BRST-10, the print procedure is the  
same as that of “Guest Check Print” shown on the preceding page.  
NOTES:  
1. The header “PRESENTATION” is printed at the top of a presentation. This operation can be  
operated any number of times for the same order table No. The receipt consecutive No. is not  
printed. Additional PLU items, if any, can still be entered after issuing a presentation.  
9-31  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint)  
2. A program option allows you to use a presentation as a real guest check. If so programmed, the  
header “PRESENTATION” is not printed. After issuing a guest check, only the sale finalization by  
the media keys is allowed for the order table No.  
Used as a presentation  
Used as a real guest check  
TABLE NO  
3
11-24-1999 WED #0  
TABLE NO  
3
11-24-1999 WED #0  
10.00T  
PRESENTATION  
PLU000010  
1
1
PLU000010  
PLU000020  
*********  
******  
*********  
******  
10.00T  
8.50T  
1
1
8.50T  
PLU000020  
SUBTL  
TAX  
TOTAL  
18.50  
2.33  
20.83  
SUBTL  
TAX  
TOTAL  
18.50  
2.33  
20.83  
1CL  
0355 18:23TM  
1CL  
18:23TM  
Consecutive No. is printed  
The header “PRESENTATION” is printed.  
9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint)  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
9.57.1 Receipt Reprint  
Operated while the receipt-issue status is “ON”.  
A sale transaction is  
finalized by the media  
keys.  
A receipt for the  
sale is issued.  
[RECEIPT ISSUE] .............. A copy receipt  
for the sale which  
has just been  
finalized is issued.  
Operated while the receipt-issue status is “OFF”.  
A sale transaction is finalized  
[RECEIPT ISSUE] ....................A receipt for the sale which has just  
by the media keys.  
been finalized is issued.  
Programmable options:  
A post-issue receipt operation after issuing an ordinary receipt is prohibited.  
A post-issue receipt is always issued as a total-only receipt. If this option is not selected then the post-issue  
receipt will be an itemized-receipt for a sales transaction of which print lines are below 50 or less. When the  
print lines exceeds 50, a post-issue receipt becomes a total-only receipt.  
Operation of a post-issue receipt can be performed any number of times. If this option is not selected then the  
operation can be performed only once.  
NOTE: A post-issue receipt for the received-on-account or the paid-out transaction cannot be issued.  
9-32  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint)  
9.57.2 Guest Check Reprint  
|Order Table No.| [START CHECK]  
1 to 999.9  
PLU items are  
[RECEIPT ISSUE] ............ A copy guest  
entered and a  
guest check is  
issued by a  
check for the  
sale which has  
just been  
sales transaction  
finalized by the  
media keys.  
finalized is  
issued.  
The following operation is allowed when the program option “Presentation is used as a real guest check” has  
been selected.  
|Order Table No.| [PRINT CHECK]  
1 to 999.9  
A guest check  
is issued.  
[RECEIPT ISSUE] ........... A copy guest  
check is issued.  
Programmable option:  
Operation of the guest check print can be performed any number of times. If this option is not selected then  
the operation can be performed only once.  
Ordinary Receipt  
Post-issue Receipt  
11-23-1999 TUE  
#0  
11-23-1999 TUE  
#0  
1
1
PLU000010  
PLU000020  
10.00T  
8.50T  
18.50  
COPY  
***  
**  
***  
**  
1
1
PLU000010  
PLU000020  
10.00T  
8.50T  
18.50  
2.33  
SUBTL  
TAX  
CASH  
2.33  
20.83  
SUBTL  
TAX  
CASH  
20.83  
ITEM  
1CL  
2
0378 11:56TM  
ITEM  
1CL  
2
0378 11:56TM  
A copy receipt header is printed  
when a post-issue receipt is  
issued after an ordinary receipt.  
“INV COPY” is printed as a  
copy guest check header.  
The receipt consecutive No. printed on a post-issue receipt is  
the same as that of an ordinary receipt.  
9.58 Server Transfer  
Account of order tables which are handled by a cashier can be partially or entirely transferred to another cashier’s  
account.  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
When all the accounts which appears in the operator display  
are transferred.  
|Cashier Code| [SERVER TRANS.]  
[AT/TL]  
[] or []  
[SELECT]  
[C] to cancel  
Enter the cashier  
code of the  
destination  
To select an account you want  
to transfer, move the cursor to it  
using the [] or the [] key, then  
depress the [SELECT] key.  
Repeatable if multiple accounts are transferred.  
9-33  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
SERVER TRANSFER  
2
P1S1  
8.50  
10.00  
18.50  
2
1
3
TOTAL  
ITEM  
SERVER TRANSFER  
0.00  
2
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out  
This operation records working total hours of each employee.  
OPERATION  
Clock-in  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
Through the operator display  
Select your job from a  
menu window using  
[IN]  
|Employee No.|  
1 to 9999  
[SERVER #]  
or  
[ENTER] ....... Clock-in time is  
recorded.  
[ENTER]  
the [] or the [] key.  
Through the keyboard  
A menu window appears.  
|Job No.|  
1 to 10  
REG  
CLOCK IN  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
0001  
P1S1  
01 CASHIER  
02 COOK  
03 SERVER  
Jobs assigned to  
each employee  
0.01  
TOTAL  
Enter  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Break-in  
[BREAK IN]  
|Employee No.|  
[SERVER #]  
or  
[ENTER] ................. Break-in time is  
recorded.  
[ENTER]  
REG  
BREAK IN  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
0001  
P1S1  
Please verify name and hit Enter.  
0.01  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
9-34  
EO1-11138  
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out  
Break-out  
[BREAK OUT]  
|Employee No.|  
[SERVER #]  
or  
[ENTER] ............... Break-out time is  
recorded.  
[ENTER]  
REG  
BREAK OUT  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
0001  
P1S1  
Please verify name and hit Enter.  
0.01  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
Clock-out  
[OUT]  
|Employee No.|  
[SERVER #]  
or  
[ENTER] ............... Clock-out time is  
recorded.  
[ENTER]  
REG  
CLOCK OUT  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
0001  
P1S1  
Please verify name and hit Enter.  
0.01  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
NOTES:  
1. This operation is allowed only when the program options “Employee Management Adopted” and  
“Floating Cashier Adopted” have been selected.  
2. Clock-in/clock-out entry is allowed up to three times in a day.  
3. Data of working total hours of each employee is collected to the employee clock-in/clock-out  
report.  
9-35  
EO1-11138  
10. TROUBLESHOOTING  
10.1 Problems concerning the Power Supply  
10. TROUBLESHOOTING  
IN CASE OF A POWER FAILURE  
If a power failure occurs during business hours, all the sales data stored in the memory will be  
automatically protected by the battery installed in the register. When the power returns, the  
register will resume displaying the screen which had been displayed just before the power failure.  
The following are possible causes and countermeasures against typical problems. When a problem occurs, refer to  
this chapter to find a cause of the problem, then take appropriate countermeasures. If a problem not described here  
occurs, or a problem still exists after taking the following countermeasures, ask the store manager to contact your  
authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance. In this case, inform the store manager of your problem in  
detail.  
1. Problems concerning the Power Supply  
2. Problems concerning the Keyboard  
3. Problems concerning the Drawer  
4. Problems concerning the Display  
5. Problems during Normal Operations  
WARNING!  
If you cannot solve a problem with the following solutions, do not attempt to repair it yourself.  
Turn the power off, then contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.  
10.1 Problems concerning the Power Supply  
Power is not turned ON.  
Cause 1:  
Register is not plugged in.  
Action:  
Plug in an outlet.  
Cause 2:  
Action:  
The power switch provided to the register is in the OFF position.  
Turn the power switch ON.  
Cause 3:  
Action:  
The outlet does not supply the power.  
Use another outlet.  
10.2 Problems concerning the Keyboard  
Key on the keyboard does not function.  
Cause 1:  
Mode Lock is in the OFF position.  
Action:  
Turn the Mode Lock to the positions other than OFF using the Mode Selector Key.  
Cause 2:  
Action:  
Failure of the keyboard itself  
Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.  
10-1  
EO1-11138  
10. TROUBLESHOOTING  
10.3 Problems concerning the Drawer  
10.3 Problems concerning the Drawer  
Drawer does not open.  
Cause 1:  
Drawer blocked by foreign substance (coin, etc.).  
Action:  
Try to open the drawer by removing the foreign substance, using a ruler or something. If you are still  
unable to open the drawer ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC  
representative for assistance.  
Cause 2:  
Action:  
Failure of the drawer itself  
Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.  
10.4 Problems concerning the Display  
10.4.1 Operator Display  
Display blank.  
Cause 1:  
Register is not securely plugged in.  
Action:  
Securely plug in an outlet.  
Cause 2:  
Action:  
The operator display is in the power-save mode.  
Depress any key.  
Cause 3:  
Action:  
The brightness control provided to the operator display is adjusted improperly.  
Adjust it properly.  
Cause 4:  
Action:  
Failure of the LCD  
Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.  
10.4.2 Customer Display  
Some segment is not displayed, display shimmers, or illumination of the display is uneven.  
Cause 1:  
Failure of the display tube  
Action:  
Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.  
10.5 Problems during Normal Operations  
NOTE on changing the Mode Lock position:  
Changing the Mode Lock position during sales entries or programming causes an error. To clear the error, return  
the Mode Lock to the original position. However, changing the Mode Lock position to the OFF does not cause an  
error. Error caused by changing the Mode Lock position cannot be cleared by the [C] key.  
Normal operations cannot be carried out.  
Cause 1:  
Action:  
Mode Lock position does not correspond to the operation you attempted.  
Check whether or not the Mode Lock position corresponds to the operation. (Especially, check  
whether or not the operation you attempted requires the MGR position. Ask your manager about the  
operations which requires the MGR position.)  
10-2  
2. STAND-ALONE LEVEL  
MANAGER’S GUIDE  
Table of Contents  
TOC 2  
EO1-11138  
FS-2600-1 SERIES  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Page  
1. MANAGER INTERVENTION ............................................................................1-1  
1.1  
1.2  
Items Programmed to Require Manager Intervention......................................................1-1  
Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions ........................................................1-2  
2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE ....................................2-1  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
Pick Up Operation............................................................................................................2-1  
Enforced Sign-off of a Cashier (Code Entry Method) ......................................................2-1  
Enforced Clock-out of an Employee ................................................................................2-2  
PLU Menu Shift Entry ......................................................................................................2-2  
RKP Table Change ..........................................................................................................2-3  
3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE ........................................................................3-1  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS ............................................................4-1  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
How to Access a Report Item ..........................................................................................4-1  
Time Edit for Employee Clock-in/Clock-out .....................................................................4-8  
Combination Reports .......................................................................................................4-9  
General Notes on Report Takings .................................................................................4-10  
Report Sample Format ..................................................................................................4-10  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS .....................................................................5-1  
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
Before you enter the SET Mode ......................................................................................5-1  
Character Entries .............................................................................................................5-2  
Condition Required for Programming Operations............................................................5-4  
How to Access a Program Item .......................................................................................5-5  
Store Name/Message, Commercial Message,  
Footer Logo Message Programming (Submode 1) ....................................................5-7  
Cashier Programming (Submode 2) ...........................................................................5-8  
Department Table Programming (Submode 3) ........................................................5-11  
PLU Table Programming (Submode 4) ....................................................................5-17  
Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5) ................................................................5-24  
Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6) .................................................................5-25  
Hourly Range Setting (Submode 7)..........................................................................5-26  
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8)..............................................5-27  
Non-taxable Amount Limit Setting (for Canada)/  
Gratuity Rate Setting (Submode 12) .......................................................................5-28  
Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13).....................................................5-29  
Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14).....................................................5-30  
Customer File Table Setting (Submode 15) .............................................................5-31  
Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19) .........................................5-32  
PLU Stock Loading or Changing (Submode 24) ......................................................5-34  
TOC 1  
EO1-11138  
FS-2600-1 SERIES  
Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26) ....................................5-35  
PLU Preset-code Key/Display Key Setting (Submode 27) .......................................5-36  
PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29)......................................................5-38  
RKP Message Programming (Submode 30) ...........................................................5-39  
Display Message Programming (Submode 31) .......................................................5-40  
Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key (Submode 35)...........................................5-41  
Set Menu Table Programming (Submode 42) ..........................................................5-42  
Combo Sale Table Programming (Submode 43) .....................................................5-43  
Guest Check Commercial Message Programming (Submode 45)...........................5-47  
Day Part Setting (Submode 46)................................................................................5-48  
Employee Table Setting (Submode 50)....................................................................5-49  
Job Code/Working Hours Setting (Submode 51) .....................................................5-50  
Tender Up Table Setting (Submode 52)...................................................................5-52  
Display Menu Table Setting (Submode 53) ..............................................................5-53  
PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing (Submode 60) .............................................5-55  
Printer Table Setting (Submode 71) .........................................................................5-56  
%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting ................................................................................5-58  
Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2) ........................................5-59  
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting ................................................................5-61  
Store/Register No. Setting ........................................................................................5-62  
6. Verification of Programmed Data ..................................................................6-1  
6.1  
6.2  
How to verify a Programmed Data through the Operator Display ...................................6-1  
How to verify a Programmed Data through the Keyboard ...............................................6-2  
EO1-11138  
1. MANAGER INTERVENTION  
1.1 Items Programmed to Require Manager Intervention  
1. MANAGER INTERVENTION  
1.1  
Items Programmed to Require Manager Intervention  
During daily sale entry operations, a cashier may call for Manager Interventions.  
1) During operations, a cashier comes across an item that requires Manager Intervention. The cashier, already  
informed of it, may immediately call for Manager Intervention. Or the cashier, without knowing of it, attempts  
the operation, and an error results with the Error Message “MANAGER REQUIRED” displayed, clears the  
error by the [C] key, and then calls for Manager Intervention.  
2) The manager goes to the cashier counter with the MGR or MA key.  
3) The cashier explains what kind of operation is attempted, and removes the REG key from the Mode Lock at  
the “REG” position.  
4) The manager inserts the MGR or MA key and turns it to the “MGR” position.  
5) The cashier operates the required item.  
6) The manager returns the MGR or MA key to the “REG” position and removes it .  
7) The cashier sets the REG key to the “REG” position again and continues registering operations.  
The following is the table of the keys and operations that are programmable with Manager Intervention. Fill in the  
table by marking in the “Not Required” or “Required” column of each item.  
KEYS/OPERATIONS AND MANAGER INTERVENTION STATUS TABLE  
KEY  
Manager Intervention  
Not required Required  
Reference  
[DISC]  
As for the key status change, ask your TOSHIBA  
TEC representative.  
[RECALL]  
[TIP PAID]  
[CHARGE TIP]  
[%] ([% 1] to [% 8])  
[VOID]  
[PO]  
[MENU 1] to [MENU 5]  
[PRICE 1] to [PRICE 5]  
[EX]  
[ALL VOID]  
[NS]  
[RTR]  
1-1  
EO1-11138  
1. MANAGER INTERVENTION  
1.2 Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions  
KEYS/OPERATIONS AND MANAGER INTERVENTION STATUS TABLE (continued)  
OPERATION  
Manager Intervention  
Not required Required  
Reference  
Credit Balance  
(NOTE 1 below)  
As for the status change, ask your TOSHIBA TEC  
representative.  
Negative-balance Sale  
Finalization by Media  
Keys (except [AT/TL])  
(NOTE 2)  
Negative PLU Entries  
Media Transfer  
Guest Check Transfer  
Guest Check Merge  
Guest Check Split  
PLU Price Read  
PLU Stock Read  
NOTES:  
1. The “Credit Balance” means that amount entries through [DISC], [VOID] will result in over-  
subtraction of the subtotal amount at the time of the entry through any of those keys. If the status  
“Not required” is selected, over-subtraction using these keys will be allowed in the “REG” mode.  
However, over-subtraction using the [DISC] or [VOID] key is prohibited regardless of the credit  
balance option if a sales transaction has been entered with an order table No. entry.  
2. The “Negative-balance Sale” may be caused by:  
1. Credit Balance of which status “Allowed” is selected.  
2. Amounts entered through the [VOID] key (without an order table No. entry).  
3. Amounts entered through negative PLUs.  
4. Other negative amounts.  
1.2  
Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions  
Amount Limit Release  
Amount Limits may be programmed on PLUs, Tender Media, [DISC]. These limits are programmed to check an  
excessively high or low amount entry by cashier’s mistake at the earliest stage.  
1) During sale entries by a cashier, an error occurs when a PLU item has been entered, or a key (one of the  
media keys, the [DISC] key) has been depressed.  
2) The cashier clears the error by the [C] key. The cashier confirms the amount and operates the item again.  
3) If the same error occurs again, the cashier attempts to enter the amount using the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key.  
4) If the operation results in an error again, the Amount Limit cannot be released by the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key.  
5) The cashier calls for Manager Intervention.  
The procedure thereafter is the same as Steps 2) to 7) for the Items Programmed to Require Manager  
Intervention on the preceding page.  
1-2  
EO1-11138  
1. MANAGER INTERVENTION  
1.2 Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions  
Reference:  
For reading the high and low amount limits of each PLU:  
Chapter 6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA  
Department Status Read  
(Amount limit of each PLU is restricted by the amount limit of its linked department.)  
For setting the item above:  
Chapter 5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION  
Department Table Programming (Submode 3)  
(Amount limit of each PLU is restricted by the amount limit of its linked department.)  
For reading the common high and low amount limits of all the PLUs, and the high amount limit of each tender  
media key:  
Chapter 6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA  
Function Key Amount Limit Read  
For setting the item above:  
Chapter 5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION  
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys  
(Submode 8)  
For reading an amount limit of the [DISC] key:  
Chapter 6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA  
Dollar Discount Amount Limit Read  
For setting the item above:  
Chapter 5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION  
Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key  
(Submode 35)  
1-3  
EO1-11138  
2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE  
2.1 Pick Up Operation  
2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE  
The following are operations possible only in the “MGR” position of the Mode Lock, which are performed by the  
manager.  
2.1  
Pick Up Operation  
This operation is used to collect money from a drawer, during the day, for banking purpose, etc.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
[PO]  
Any time outside a sale, in a Signed-ON condition.  
Mode Lock: MGR  
|Media Amount Collected| [MEDIA KEY]  
([ST])  
[AT/TL]  
Max. 8 digits  
NOTE 2  
Drawer  
opens.  
Repeat until all the collected media amounts are recorded.  
NOTES:  
1. Each media key can be programmed with its in-drawer limit. On reaching this limit in sale entries  
(on finalizing a sales transaction), the Error Message “DRAWER LIMIT” is displayed with an  
alarm generated to notify a cashier that the Pick Up operation is needed.  
2. Depress the media keys corresponding to the collected media ([AT/TL] for cash). The media  
keys that can be operated here are those programmed to print their media-in-drawer amounts in  
reports.  
3. Depress [ST], if necessary, to obtain the subtotal amount of the medias so far collected.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
SERVER DROP  
CASH  
CPN  
*
*
300.00  
150.00  
450.00  
TOTAL  
TOTAL  
450.00  
450.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
2.2  
Enforced Sign-off of a Cashier (Code Entry Method)  
If a cashier once signed ON, then signed OUT to take a break does not come back, no one can operate the  
register. In this case, the manager can perform this operation to forcibly release the cashier signed-OUT  
condition.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
In a Signed-OUT condition  
Mode Lock: MGR  
|2-digit manager-assign code| [SERVER #]............................... Same as a normal sign-OFF  
01 to 99  
2-1  
EO1-11138  
2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE  
2.3 Enforced Clock-out of an Employee  
2.3  
Enforced Clock-out of an Employee  
If an employee who once clocked in forgets to perform the clock-out operation, the manager can perform this  
operation.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
[OUT]  
In a Clock-IN and Signed-OFF condition  
Mode Lock: MGR  
|Employee No.|  
[OUT]  
1 to 9999  
|Date| |Hour| |Minute|  
0 to 23 0 to 59  
[SERVER #]....................Same as a normal clock-OUT,  
or  
however the symbol “**” is  
displayed at the right of an entered  
clock-out time.  
[ENTER]  
If necessary  
Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)  
Day-Month-Year  
Year-Month-Day  
2.4  
PLU Menu Shift Entry  
Up to five different menus can be programmed for each [PLU Preset-code Key] and you can select either of the  
following two features.  
2.4.1  
Menu Shift Entry “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: MGR  
(PLU entries)  
[MENU 2]  
to  
PLU entry ....................... After the PLU Entry, the  
menu mode automatically  
[MENU 5]  
returns to the 1st menu mode.  
with the 1st menu  
with shifted menu  
Menu shift declaration  
2.4.2  
Menu Shift Entry “Keeping the shifted Menu Level” Feature  
You can shift the PLU menu level to another in the following two cases.  
Using the [MENU] key  
The same key operation as “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature. However, the shifted menu level is  
held until another [MENU] key is depressed.  
Using the Hourly Range Designation  
Hourly range to start shifting each menu level can be programmed. If programmed, the menu level will be  
automatically shifted to another when the hourly range starts.  
2-2  
EO1-11138  
2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE  
2.5 RKP Table Change  
NOTE: A program option allows you to perform this  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
operation in the REG mode.  
MENU3  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
2.5  
RKP Table Change  
This operation changes an RKP (remote kitchen printer) on which the data is outputted.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: MGR  
RKP Designation  
|RKP No.|  
[RKP]  
1 to 4  
RKP of which No. is entered will be designated as the destination of the data output.  
Example) If you operate 123 then [RKP], the RKPs of Nos. 1 to 3 will be designated.  
If you operate 0 then [RKP], no RKPs will be designated.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
RKP1  
RKP2  
RKP3  
RKP4  
RKP  
0.01  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
RKP Connection Table Change  
[RKP] ........................ Each time you depress the [RKP] key, the RKP connection table is changed from 1 to  
2, and vice versa.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
1
R
Terminal  
ID No.  
Port  
No.  
RKP Connection  
Table No. (1 or 2)  
1 1  
1 2  
0
0
0
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
RKP1  
RKP2  
RKP3  
RKP4  
J
0
RKP  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
2-3  
EO1-11138  
3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE  
3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE  
3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE  
When a cashier has entered some data in a guest order table buffer memory (started with an order table No.  
entry and ended with the [TOTAL] key) and then all the entries must be cancelled, you can quickly delete them in  
the - position of the Mode Lock instead of deleting items one by one using the[VOID] key. For a sale entered  
without an order table No. entry, the - mode is available by doing the same operation in REG or MGR mode.  
CONDITION Any time outside a sale  
Turn the Mode Lock to the - position.  
To delete sale items without an order table No. entry:  
Enter the same items that were purchased in “REG” mode and the amount is subtracted from the memory.  
Operator display in the REG or MGR mode  
Operator display in the - mode  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
REG-  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
*
*
1
SUBTL  
TAX  
PLU000010  
10.00T  
REG-  
1
SUBTL  
TAX  
*
*
10.00  
0.80  
10.80  
PLU000010  
10.00T  
10.00  
CASH  
0.80  
10.80  
CASH  
¾®  
CASH  
CASH  
10.80  
10.80  
10.80  
10.80  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
1
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
To delete items ordered with an order table No. entry (Order Table No. Manual Entry):  
|Order Table No.| [START CHECK] [ALL VOID] ............All the entry data of the table is deleted.  
To delete items ordered with an order table No. (Order Table No. Automatic Entry):  
|Order Table No.| [RECALL] [ALL VOID] ............All the entry data of the table is deleted.  
Operator display in the REG or MGR mode  
Operator display in the - mode  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
REG-  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
*
*
TABLE NO  
PLU000001  
PLU000010  
001  
P1S1  
1.00T  
10.00T  
TABLE NO  
REG-  
001  
P1S1  
1
1
*
*
1
1
PLU000001  
PLU000010  
1.00T  
10.00  
¾®  
NEW BALANCE001  
ALL VD  
11.90  
0.00  
2
TOTAL  
DISP3  
11.90  
DISP5  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
NOTE: You can cancel only an order table which has been temporarily finalized by the[TOTAL] key.  
3-1  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.1 How to Access a Report Item  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
This chapter describes the operation to take each report and its contents.  
A read (X) report allows you to read the totals but not clear the memory. After issuing a read report, only a  
header of its report is written into the electronic journal buffer memory.  
A reset (Z) report allows you to read the totals and, at the same time, clear all the resettable totals. After  
issuing a reset report, all the data of its report is written into the electronic journal buffer memory.  
A symbol “X” is printed at the top of a read report, while “Z” is printed on a reset report to indicate the type of  
report.  
A reset report counter is printed on each reset report only.  
A daily report covers the data obtained during a certain period on that day until the corresponding reset report  
is issued, while a periodic report covers the data obtained during a certain period defined by the store.  
When you issue a read report, make sure that the receipt-issue status is in “ON”. If the receipt-issue OFF  
message is displayed in the operator display, depress the [SERVER#/RECEIPT] key so that the message  
disappears. As for a reset report, it can be issued even while the receipt-issue OFF message is displayed.  
WARNING!  
When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.  
4.1  
How to Access a Report Item  
Two ways are available to access a report item you want to issue; through the operator display and through the  
keyboard.  
4.1.1  
How to Access a Report Item through the Operator Display  
When you turn the mode selector key to the X or Z position, the initial screens shown below will appear.  
X Mode  
Z Mode  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
Z/GTZ 02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
*
*
1
2
X
GTX  
1
2
Z
GTZ  
3 PROGRAM READ  
4 E-JOURNAL  
5 OTHERS  
3 E-JOURNAL  
4 OTHERS  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
TOTAL  
COMB3  
0.00  
TOTAL  
COMB3  
0.00  
COMB1  
COMB2  
EJ  
COMB1  
COMB2  
EJ  
Description of each Navigation Key (Initial screen in X or Z)  
13  
14  
15  
13  
14  
15  
1
2
3
4
5
••••*••••  
10  
••••*••••  
20••••*••••  
30••••*••••  
40  
4-1  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.1 How to Access a Report Item  
Display Item  
Description  
1 Navigation Key 1  
2 Navigation Key 2  
3 Navigation Key 3  
4 Navigation Key 4  
5 Navigation Key 5  
COMB1  
COMB2  
COMB3  
EJ  
X Mode:  
Z Mode:  
Start key for the daily combination read report 1  
Start key for the daily combination reset report 1  
X Mode:  
Z Mode:  
Start key for the daily combination read report 2  
Start key for the daily combination reset report 2  
X Mode:  
Z Mode:  
Start key for the daily combination read report 3  
Start key for the daily combination reset report 3  
X Mode:  
Z Mode:  
Start key for the all electronic journal data read report  
Start key for the all electronic journal data reset report  
Cursor key  
Example) If you want to issue the daily all cashiers read report, operate as follows.  
Select “1 X” from the initial screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below  
appears.  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
X
*
*
0 COMBINATION  
1 COMBINATION1  
2 COMBINATION2  
3 FINANCIAL  
4 CLERK  
6 CREDIT  
8 GROUP  
9 MEDIA ALL  
10 HOURLY  
11 DP  
12 MEDIA  
13 PLU  
14 STOCK  
15 CUSTOMER  
24 PLU GROUP  
25 DAY PART  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
In the X or Z mode, the navigation keys are changed as follows from the second screen or later.  
Display Item  
Description  
1 Navigation Key 1  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Requests the preceding report item screen.  
2 Navigation Key 2  
3 Navigation Key 3  
4 Navigation Key 4  
5 Navigation Key 5  
Requests the next report item screen.  
Decides a selected item.  
Cursor Key  
Cursor key  
To be Continued  
4-2  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.1 How to Access a Report Item  
Continued  
Select “4 CLERK” from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below  
appears.  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
X
*
*
1 ALL  
2 INDIVIDUAL  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Select “1 ALL” from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below  
appears.  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
X
CLERK  
1 PRINT OUT  
2 DISPLAY  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
If you want to print out the report, select “1 PRINT OUT”, then depress the [ENTER] key.  
If you only want to verify the report on the display, select “2 DISPLAY”, then depress the [ENTER] key.  
NOTES:  
1. If you want to cancel a selected item already decided by the [ENTER] key and go back to the  
preceding screen, depress the [ESC] key.  
2. If you want to interrupt a report print-out or a report display already started by the final [ENTER]  
key, depress the [ITEM CORR] or the [VOID] key.  
4-3  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.1 How to Access a Report Item  
4.1.2  
How to Access a Report Item through the Keyboard  
You can directly access a report item you want to issue through a key operation on the keyboard.  
Daily Reports  
Report Name  
Mode  
Lock  
Key Operation  
Sample  
Page  
FINANCIAL READ AND RESET  
4-10  
Financial Read  
Financial Reset  
X
Z
3 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)  
CASHIER READ AND RESET  
4-12  
All Cashier Read  
All Cashier Reset  
X
Z
4 [ST] (Drawer opens.)  
Individual Cashier Read  
Individual Cashier Reset  
X
Z
Code Entry Method:  
4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
Cashier Key Method:  
Depress the required Cashier Key,  
then 4 [AT/TL]  
CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES READ AND  
RESET  
4-12  
Credit Card Company Sales Read  
Credit Card Company Sales Reset  
X
Z
6 [AT/TL]  
DEPARTMENT GROUP READ  
X
X
8 [AT/TL]  
4-13  
4-13  
4-14  
MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER TOTAL READ  
9 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)  
HOURLY RANGE READ AND RESET  
Hourly Read  
Hourly Reset  
X
Z
10 [AT/TL]  
DEPARTMENT READ AND RESET  
4-14  
All department Read  
All department Reset  
X
Z
11 [AT/TL]  
ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN-  
DRAWER READ  
X
12 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)  
4-15  
4-15  
PLU READ AND RESET  
*
Individual PLU Read  
X
13 [#]  
|PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST])  
Repeatable  
[AT/TL]  
* (May be replaced by  
[PLU Preset-code Key])  
Zone PLU Read  
Zone PLU Reset  
X
Z
13 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]  
PLU Code | PLU Code |  
All PLU Read  
All PLU Reset  
X
Z
13 [AT/TL]  
13 [#] 0 [AT/TL]  
Inactive PLU Read  
X
4-4  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.1 How to Access a Report Item  
Daily Reports (Continued)  
Report Name  
Mode  
Lock  
Key Operation  
Sample  
Page  
PLU STOCK READ  
4-17  
Individual PLU Stock  
X
X
14 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable  
Zone PLU Stock  
All PLU Stock  
14 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]  
PLU Code | PLU Code |  
X
X
14 [AT/TL]  
CUSTOMER FILE READ AND RESET  
4-17  
Individual File Read  
15 [#] |File Code| [X] [AT/TL]  
Zone File Read  
Zone File Reset  
X
Z
15 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]  
File Code |  
File Code |  
All File Read  
All File Reset  
X
Z
15 [AT/TL]  
Inactive File Read  
X
15 [#] 0 [AT/TL]  
PLU GROUP SALES READ AND RESET  
4-18  
4-19  
4-19  
PLU Group Sales Read  
PLU Group Sales Reset  
X
Z
24 [AT/TL]  
DAY PART READ AND RESET  
Day Part Read  
Day Part Reset  
X
Z
25 [AT/TL]  
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITH SALES  
READ AND RESET  
All Cashier Read  
All Cashier Reset  
X
Z
30 [ST]  
Code Entry Method:  
Individual Cashier Read  
Individual Cashier Reset  
X
Z
30 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
NOTE: You can check opened order tables.  
Cashier Key Method:  
Depress the required Cashier Key,  
then 30 [AT/TL]  
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITHOUT  
SALES READ  
4-20  
All Cashier  
Individual Cashier  
X
X
31 [ST]  
Code Entry Method:  
31 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
NOTE: You can check reserved order tables.  
Cashier Key Method:  
Depress the required Cashier Key,  
then 31 [AT/TL]  
4-5  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.1 How to Access a Report Item  
Daily Reports (Continued)  
Report Name  
Mode  
Lock  
Key Operation  
Sample  
Page  
COMBO SALE READ AND RESET  
4-20  
Individual Combo Read  
X
43 [#] |Combo Code| [#] ([ST]) [AT/TL]  
Repeatable  
All Combo Read  
All Combo Reset  
X
Z
43 [ST]  
All Combo Read (detail)  
All Combo Reset (detail)  
X
Z
43 [AT/TL]  
HOURLY COMBO SALE READ AND RESET  
4-21  
4-22  
Hourly Combo Sale Read  
Hourly Combo Sale Reset  
X
Z
44 [AT/TL]  
EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT READ AND  
RESET  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Read  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Reset  
X
Z
47 [AT/TL]  
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL DATA READ AND  
RESET  
4-23  
All Data Read  
All Data Reset  
X
Z
50 [AT/TL]  
Either can be omitted.  
Consecutive No./Date Read  
X
50 [#] 2 [#] |Consecutive No.| [#] |Date| [AT/TL]  
Max. 4 digits  
Month-Day-Year  
8 digits (NOTE below)  
All Guest Check Read  
Cashier/Date Read  
X
X
50 [#] 3 [#] [AT/TL]  
50 [#] 4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [#] (|Date|) [AT/TL]  
(2-digit  
manager-  
assign  
Code)  
Month-Day-Year  
8 digits (NOTE below)  
* omissible  
Clock-in/Clock-out/Date Read  
X
50 [#] 5 [#] (|Date|) [AT/TL]  
Month-Day-Year  
8 digits (NOTE below)  
* omissible  
Transmission History Read  
X
X
50 [#] 6 [#] [AT/TL]  
EJ Buffer Remaining Line Read  
50 [#] 7 [#] [AT/TL] (Display only)  
NOTE: A program option allows you to select the date order as follows.  
Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)  
Day-Month-Year  
Year-Month-Day  
4-6  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.1 How to Access a Report Item  
GT Reports -- to be taken on weekly or monthly basis --  
Report Name  
Mode  
Lock  
Key Operation  
Sample  
Page  
FINANCIAL GT READ AND RESET  
4-24  
Financial GT Read  
Financial GT Reset  
X
Z
203 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)  
CASHIER GT READ AND RESET  
4-24  
All Cashier GT Read  
All Cashier GT Reset  
X
Z
204 [ST] (Drawer opens.)  
Individual Cashier GT Read  
Individual Cashier GT Reset  
X
Z
Code Entry Method:  
204 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
Cashier Key Method:  
Depress the required Cashier Key,  
then 204 [AT/TL]  
CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES GT READ  
AND RESET  
4-24  
Credit Card Company Sales GT Read  
Credit Card Company Sales GT Reset  
X
Z
206 [AT/TL]  
DEPARTMENT GROUP GT READ  
X
208 [AT/TL]  
4-24  
4-24  
DEPARTMENT GT READ AND RESET  
All Department GT Read  
All Department GT Reset  
X
Z
211 [AT/TL]  
PLU GT READ AND RESET  
*
4-24  
Individual PLU GT Read  
X
213 [#]  
|PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST])  
Repeatable  
[AT/TL]  
* (May be replaced by  
[PLU Preset-code Key])  
Zone PLU GT Read  
Zone PLU GT Reset  
X
Z
213 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]  
PLU Code | PLU Code |  
All PLU GT Read  
All PLU GT Reset  
X
Z
213 [AT/TL]  
Inactive PLU GT Read  
X
213 [#] 0 [AT/TL]  
PLU GROUP SALES GT READ AND RESET  
4-24  
4-24  
PLU Group Sales GT Read  
PLU Group Sales GT Reset  
X
Z
224 [AT/TL]  
EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT GT READ  
AND RESET  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Read  
(weekly)  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Reset  
(weekly)  
X
Z
247 [AT/TL]  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Read  
(periodic)  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Reset  
(periodic)  
X
Z
248 [AT/TL]  
4-7  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.1 How to Access a Report Item  
4.2  
Time Edit for Employee Clock-in/Clock-out  
This operation is used to edit the recorded time of an employee clock-in/clock-out and total break hours.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
An employee of which recorded time is edited must be “Clock OUT”. Furthermore if the  
employee has a cashier code, “Sign OFF” is also necessary.  
Mode Lock: Z (Allowed only through the operator display)  
As described in section 4.1.1, select “47 EMPLOYEE”  
from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the  
[ENTER] key. The screen shown below appears.  
Select “2 EDIT TIME” from the screen using the  
cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The  
screen shown below appears.  
Z/GTZ 02-06-1999 03:04  
Z/GTZ 02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
*
*
Z
EMPLOYEE  
Z
EMPLOYEE  
EMPLOYEE COD  
1 ALL  
0
2 EDIT TIME  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
Please input Employee code.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Select an item you want to edit from the screen using  
the cursor key, enter time, then depress the [ENTER]  
key. In this case, the clock-out time is changed from  
17:40 to 18:40. A symbol “**” is displayed at the  
right of the edited time and “TOTAL HOURS” is  
automatically recalculated.  
Enter an employee code, then depress the [ENTER]  
key. The screen shown below appears.  
Z/GTZ 02-06-1999 03:04  
Z/GTZ 02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
*
*
Z
EMPLOYEE  
O001  
CASHIER  
IN  
Z
EMPLOYEE  
O001  
CASHIER  
IN  
0001  
01  
0001  
01  
09:30  
18:40  
00:10  
09:00  
09:30  
17:40  
00:10  
08:00  
OUT  
TOTAL BREAK  
TOTAL HOURS  
OUT  
TOTAL BREAK  
TOTAL HOURS  
**  
Please input data.  
Please input data.  
0.00  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
NOTE: You can designate and enter the date before the time entry, if necessary.  
A program option allows you to select the date order as follows.  
Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)  
Day-Month-Year  
Year-Month-Day  
4-8  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.3 Combination Reports  
4.3  
Combination Reports  
You can issue a combination report which consists of a maximum of 5 reports selected from the list shown below,  
and you can program your own 3 combination reports. As for the programming, refer to the next chapter  
PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS.  
REPORT NAME  
REPORT AVAILABLE  
Financial Report  
All Cashier Report  
Credit Company Sales Report  
Department Group Report  
Media Sales and In-drawer Report  
Hourly Range Report  
All Department Report  
All Media Sales & Cash-in-drawer Report  
All PLU Report  
All PLU Stock Report  
All Guest File Report  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
GTX  
GTX  
GTX  
GTX  
GTZ  
GTZ  
GTZ  
Z
Z
GTX  
GTX  
GTZ  
GTZ  
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
PLU Group Sales Report  
Day Part Report  
GTX  
GTZ  
Check Track with Sales Report (All Cashier)  
Check Track without Sales Report (All Cashier)  
All Combo Sale Report (detail)  
Hourly Combo Sale Report  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Report  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Report (weekly)  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Report (periodic)  
Z
Z
Z
GTX  
GTX  
GTZ  
GTZ  
KEY OPERATION: Mode Lock: X for Read  
|
| [AT/TL]  
Z for Reset  
Enter the Report No.:  
None (simply depress [AT/TL]): Daily Combination Report 1  
200: GT Combination Report 1  
1:  
201: GT Combination Report 2  
2: Daily Combination Report 3  
202: GT Combination Report 3  
Daily Combination Report 2  
*
As for the daily combination reports 1 to 3, you can issue them by simply depressing the corresponding  
navigation keys COMB1 to COMB3.  
NOTES:  
1. If a report in which the issue mode does not match the mode lock position to take a combination  
report is contained in a combination report table, that report issuance will be skipped.  
2. The all department report and the financial report are initially programmed to the combination  
report 1 (daily and GT).  
3. Whether the drawer opens or not depends on the reports contained in a combination report table.  
4-9  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.4 General Notes on Report Takings  
4.4  
General Notes on Report Takings  
1. The cashier signed-OFF or signed-OUT condition is required for taking any X or Z reports in the Code Entry  
Method. (Otherwise, an error will result when the Mode Lock is turned to the “X” or “Z” position.)  
2. The [ITEM CORR] (or [VOID]) key may be depressed anytime during the printing of a report, for the purpose  
of aborting the receipt issuance. When a report abort has been operated for a reset report, the memory of the  
report data will not be cleared.  
3. The drawer opens at the start of printing for those reports which are noted with “(Drawer opens)” in the Daily  
and GT report table. However, a program option allows you to take the financial report while the drawer  
remains closed.  
4.5  
Report Sample Format  
Shown below are sample formats of the respective reports. In referring to those formats, please note the  
following:  
The data contents are merely examples to show a report format. The numeric data may not balance correctly.  
4.5.1  
Financial Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)  
11-29-1999 MON  
#3001  
Percent Discount 2 to 8  
on Subtotal Operation  
Count, Amount if any  
Date, Day-of-Week, Register No.  
Z03  
GT  
Z_FINANCIAL  
Report Symbol, Report Name  
Grand Total  
Net GT  
1177.40  
1177.20  
1177.40  
0.13  
990.94  
37.35  
61.80  
4.56  
NET GT  
GS  
%+  
NS  
Negative Other  
Income  
Department  
Item Count,  
Amount if any  
161  
1
150  
Gross Sale Item Count, Amount  
Percent Charge Operation Count, Amount  
Net Sale without Tax Item Count, Amount  
Tax 1 Amount  
TAX1  
TAX2  
TAX5  
Tax 2 Amount  
Manual Tax Amount  
Tax 3 & Tax 4 Amount if any  
NS  
150  
1094.65  
2.80  
18.00  
1.36  
Net Sale with Tax Item Count, Amount  
Charge Tip Operation Count, Amount  
CHG TIP  
HASH DP  
%-  
DISC  
GRATUITY  
TOTAL  
OPEN TABLE  
CASH  
CHECK  
Chg  
MISC  
CPN  
1
1
Positive Other Income Department Item Count, Amount  
Percent Discount on Subtotal Operation Count, Amount  
Dollar Discount on Subtotal Operation Count, Amount  
Gratuity Operation Count, Amount  
All Media Sales Customer Count, Amount  
Open Order Table (Unpaid Account) Customer Count, Amount  
Cash Sales Customer Count, Amount  
2
1
4
0.10  
3.21  
39CU  
1117.20  
184.06  
481.31  
60.00  
242.59  
15.00  
1.00  
117.45  
30.00  
5.00  
6CU  
25CU  
0CU  
7CU  
0CU  
0CU  
2CU  
2
Check Sales Customer Count, Amount  
Charge Sales Customer Count, Amount  
Misc. Media Sales Customer Count, Amount  
Coupon Sales Customer Count, Amount  
Charge Posting by Check Track Customer Count, Amount  
Received-on-Account Operation Count, Amount  
Paid Out Operation Count, Amount  
CRT TL5  
R/A  
PO  
1
See NOTE LOAN  
on the next PICK UP  
page.  
171.37  
5.00  
Loan Amount  
Pick Up Operation Count, Amount  
if selected to print by  
a program option  
1
Credit 1 to Credit 4  
Sales Customer  
Count, Amount if any  
-- To be continued --  
Combo Sale Discount  
Amount if the option “Combo  
Sale” has been selected.  
4-10  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
-- Continued --  
CASH ID  
171.37  
160.00  
242.59  
15.00  
1.00  
117.45  
24.50  
11.00  
13.00  
49.50  
0.24  
Cash-in-drawer Amount  
CHECK ID  
Chg ID  
MISC ID  
CPN ID  
CRT ID5  
TIP PAID  
CORR  
VOID  
ALL VD  
%-  
4
7
3
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
Operation Count & In-drawer Amount for each non-cash media  
Eat-in/Takeout Customer  
Count, Amount if the  
option “Eat-in/Takeout”  
has been selected.  
Tip Paid Operation Count, Amount  
Item Correct Operation Count, Amount  
Void Operation (for PLU item) Count, Amount  
All Void Operation Count, Amount  
Percent Discount on PLU item Operation Count, Amount  
Negative Department Total Item Count, Amount  
Negative Balance Sale Customer Count, Amount  
Taxable Total 1 (Sale Amount subject to Tax 1 taxation)  
Taxable Total 2 (Sale Amount subject to Tax 2 taxation)  
Tax Exempted Customer Count  
-DP TL  
-SALE  
TXBL1  
1
3.00  
See  
NOTE  
below  
2CU  
3.00  
391.45  
904.40  
TXBL2  
TAX EX  
TAX1EX  
GUEST  
1CU  
5.00  
Sale Portion Exempted from Tax 1  
Guest Total  
41CU  
CUR1  
CUR2  
ITEM/CUS  
NS /CUS  
NO SALE  
TRAY CTR  
3
3
315.96  
115.00  
Foreign Currency 1 Operation Count, Amount  
Foreign Currency 2 Operation Count, Amount  
Sales Item Count per Customer  
3.85  
Operation Count &  
Amount for each  
Foreign Currency 3  
to 5 if any  
25.41  
Net Sale per Customer  
No-sale Operation Count  
Tray Total Operation Count  
2
35  
0001Z  
Financial Reset Report Count  
(printed on the reset report only) Sale Portions  
Receipt Consecutive No., Time Exempted from  
Tax 2 to 4 if any  
0290 21:54TM  
Taxable Total 3 & 4 if any  
Selective Itemizer 1 & 2  
Operation Count, Amount if any  
NOTE: Print items surrounded by a dotted line are  
printed on a daily report only but not on a  
periodic report.  
Negative Mode ( - )  
Operation Count,  
Amount if any  
Negative Tax Amount if any  
Percent Discount 2 to 8 on PLU item  
Operation Count, Amount if any  
Dollar Discount on PLU item  
Operation Count, Amount if any  
Misc. Void Operation (other than  
PLU item) Count, Amount if any  
4-11  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
4.5.2  
Cashier Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)  
Individual Cashier Read Report Sample  
11-29-1999 MON  
#3001  
X04  
02  
GS  
X_CLERK  
2CLDYER  
50  
Cashier Code and Cashier Name  
354.90  
269.00  
9.40  
16.64  
4.56  
299.60  
2.80  
0.10  
302.30  
84.40  
91.10  
114.31  
5.00  
NS  
43  
TAX1  
TAX2  
TAX5  
NS  
CHG TIP  
DISC  
TOTAL  
OPEN TABLE  
CASH  
Chg  
43  
1
1
11CU  
3CU  
5CU  
3CU  
0CU  
0CU  
MISC  
CPN  
1.00  
Same contents as the financial report except:  
• Data of GT and Net GT is not printed.  
• Data of Server Transfer and Tip Percentage, if any, is printed.  
CASH ID  
Chg ID  
MISC ID  
CPN ID  
TIP PAID  
ALL VD  
-DP TL  
-SALE  
1.60  
114.31  
5.00  
3
1
1
1
1
1.00  
24.50  
49.50  
3.00  
1
1CU  
3.00  
TXBL1  
TXBL2  
102.00  
245.00  
TAX EX  
TAX1EX  
GUEST  
1CU  
5.00  
200.00  
25.45  
12CU  
1
CUR1  
ITEM/CUS  
NS /CUS  
TRAY CTR  
3.91  
8
0243 22:33TM  
4.5.3  
Credit Card Company Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_CREDIT  
#3001  
X06  
01  
02  
03  
CRT01  
CRT02  
CRT03  
1
1
1
21.97  
50.77  
28.46  
Company Code, Company Name, Operation Count, Amount  
Total of Operation Count and Amount  
TOTAL  
3
101.20  
0240 22:29TM  
4-12  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
4.5.4  
Department Group Read Report (Daily or Periodic)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_GROUP  
#3001  
X08  
GP  
GP  
GP  
01  
02  
03  
Minor Group 1  
Item Count, Sales Percentage, Amount  
93  
50  
1
42.01%  
413.05  
555.26  
15.00  
56.47%  
1.53%  
Total of Item Count and Amount  
TOTAL  
144  
983.31  
Major Group 1  
Item Count, Sales Percentage, Amount  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
44  
49  
34  
16  
1
6.81%  
35.20%  
36.94%  
19.53%  
1.53%  
66.95  
346.10  
363.26  
192.00  
15.00  
Total of Item Count and Amount  
TOTAL  
144  
983.31  
0239 22:29TM  
4.5.5  
Media Sales and In-drawer Total Read Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
#3001  
X09  
TOTAL  
CASH  
CHECK  
Chg  
MISC  
X_MEDIA_ALL  
38CU  
23CU  
0CU  
7CU  
0CU  
0CU  
2CU  
1087.57  
451.68  
60.00  
242.59  
15.00  
All Media Sales Customer Count, Amount  
Each Media Sale Customer Count, Amount  
CPN  
1.00  
CRT TL5  
CASH ID  
CHECK ID  
Chg ID  
MISC ID  
CPN ID  
CRT ID5  
CUR1  
117.45  
141.74  
160.00  
242.59  
15.00  
4
7
3
1
2
3
3
Each Media-in-drawer Operation Count, Amount  
(operation count for cash is not printed)  
1.00  
117.45  
315.96  
115.00  
Each Foreign Currency-in-drawer  
Operation Count, Amount  
CUR2  
0226 22:18TM  
4-13  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
4.5.6  
Hourly Range Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_HOURLY  
10:00TM  
#3001  
X10  
Hourly Range 10:01 to 12:00  
Item Count, Customer Count, Amount  
Hourly Range 12:01 to 14:00  
8
3CU  
6CU  
11CU  
4CU  
1CU  
8CU  
5CU  
63.64  
12:00TM  
24  
160.53  
326.54  
174.64  
32.76  
14:00TM  
Hourly Range 14:01 to 16:00  
Hourly Range 16:01 to 18:00  
Hourly Range 18:01 to 20:00  
Hourly Range 20:01 to 22:00  
Hourly Range 22:01 and thereafter  
44  
16:00TM  
19  
18:00TM  
5
20:00TM  
24  
143.03  
167.09  
22:00TM  
19  
0238 22:28TM  
4.5.7  
Department Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_DP_ALL  
#3001  
X11  
DP  
DP  
DP  
DP  
DP  
01  
Department 1  
Item Count, Sales Percentage (NOTE below), Amount  
Dollar Discount or %- Operation Count, Amount (Optional Print)  
28  
16  
19  
30  
17  
2.86%  
27.65  
0.00  
DISC  
02  
0
4.06%  
0
39.30  
0.00  
DISC  
03  
9.69%  
0
93.80  
0.00  
DISC  
04  
26.06%  
0
252.30  
0.00  
DISC  
05  
20.94%  
1
202.76  
0.24  
DISC  
TOTAL  
-TOTAL  
143  
1
968.31  
-3.00  
Total of Positive Departments Item Count, Amount  
Total of Negative Departments Item Count, Amount  
0237 22:27TM  
NOTE: A program option allows you to print “Customer Count” instead of “Sales Percentage”.  
4-14  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
4.5.8  
All Media Sales Total and Cash-in-Drawer Read Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_MEDIA  
#3001  
X12  
TOTAL  
38CU  
1087.57  
141.74  
All Media Sales Customer Count, Amount  
Cash-in-drawer Amount  
CASH ID  
0227 22:19TM  
4.5.9  
PLU Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)  
Individual PLU Read Report (Daily or Periodic)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_PLU_INDIV  
#3001  
X13  
000001 PLU000001  
PLU Code 1, PLU Name  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
TL  
27  
0
1
0
0
27.00  
0.00  
0.65  
0.00  
0.00  
Price Levels 1 ~ 5 Item Count, Amount  
Total Item Count, Amount of Price Levels 1 to 5  
PLU Code 2 Data  
28  
27.65  
000002 PLU000002  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
TL  
15  
0
1
0
0
37.50  
0.00  
1.80  
0.00  
0.00  
39.30  
16  
Total Data of PLU Code 1 and PLU Code 2  
TOTAL  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
P5  
TL  
42  
0
2
0
0
64.50  
0.00  
2.45  
0.00  
0.00  
66.95  
44  
0230 22:22TM  
4-15  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
All PLU Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_PLU_ALL  
#3001  
X13  
000001 PLU000001  
PLU Code 1, PLU Name  
Price Level 1 Item Count, Amount  
P1  
P3  
TL  
27  
1
28  
27.00  
0.65  
27.65  
Total Item Count, Amount of Price Levels 1 to 5  
PLU Code 2 Data  
000002 PLU000002  
P1  
P3  
TL  
15  
1
16  
37.50  
1.80  
39.30  
PLU Code 3 Data  
PLU Code 4 Data  
000003 PLU000003  
P1  
P3  
TL  
18  
1
19  
90.00  
3.80  
93.80  
000004 PLU000004  
P1  
P2  
P3  
TL  
27  
2
1
229.50  
15.60  
7.20  
30  
252.30  
PLU Code 5 Data  
000005 PLU000005  
P1  
P2  
TL  
16  
1
17  
192.00  
11.00  
203.00  
TOTAL  
P1  
P2  
P3  
135  
4
4
920.00  
35.10  
13.45  
968.55  
Total of Positive PLUs Item Count, Amount  
Total of Negative PLUs Item Count, Amount  
TL  
143  
-TOTAL  
P1  
1
1
-3.00  
-3.00  
TL  
0232 22:24TM  
NOTE: All PLU Report can be programmed to not print items and price levels having zero totals.  
Zone PLU Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)  
The format is the same as “All PLU Read or Reset Report” above. The only difference is that the Zone Read  
or Reset Report outputs the PLUs in the zone designated by the key operation to take the report.  
X13  
X_PLU_ZONE  
000001-000005  
Inactive PLU Read Report (Daily or Periodic)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_PLU_ZERO  
#3001  
X13  
000015 PLU000015  
PLU Code, PLU Name  
0233 22:25TM  
4-16  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
4.5.10 PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)  
Individual PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_STOCK_INDI  
#3001  
348  
X14  
000007 PLU000007  
PLU Code 7, PLU Name  
Minimum Stock Quantity, Current Stock Quantity  
0
0234 22:25TM  
All PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_STOCK_ALL  
#3001  
X14  
000004 PLU000004  
PLU Code 4, PLU Name  
0
0
0
0
0
520  
133  
433  
348  
176  
Minimum Stock Quantity, Current Stock Quantity  
000005 PLU000005  
000006 PLU000006  
000007 PLU000007  
000008 PLU000008  
0236 22:27TM  
Zone PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)  
The format is the same as “All PLU Stock Read Report” above. The only difference is that the Zone Read  
Report outputs the stock data of the PLUs in the zone designated by the key operation to take the report.  
X14  
X_STOCK_ZONE  
000004-000007  
Zone designation  
4.5.11 Customer File Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
Individual Customer File Read Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_CUST_INDIV  
#3001  
X15  
#000000000001 RENO  
Customer File Code 1, Customer Name  
Operation Count, Balance  
1
54.70  
0247 22:36TM  
4-17  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
All Customer File Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_CUST_ALL  
#3001  
X15  
#000000000001 RENO  
Customer File Code 1, Customer Name  
Operation Count, Balance  
Customer File Code 2 Data  
1
1
54.70  
62.75  
#000000000002 SMITH  
0246 22:35TM  
Zone Customer File Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
The format is the same as “All Customer File Read or Reset Report” above. The only difference is that the  
Zone Read or Reset Report outputs the data of the customer files in the zone designated by the key operation  
to take the report.  
X15  
X_CUST_ZONE  
000000000001_000000000010  
Inactive Customer File Read Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_CUST_ZERO  
#3001  
X15  
#000000000003 BECKHAM  
Customer File Code, Customer Name  
#000000000004 JOHNSON  
#000000000005 SHEARER  
0249 22:37TM  
4.5.12 PLU Group Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_PLU_GROUP  
#3001  
X24  
PLU GP01  
PLU GP02  
PLU GP03  
PLU GP04  
PLU GP05  
PLU Group 1  
Item Count, Sales Percentage, Amount  
44  
49  
34  
16  
1
6.81%  
35.19%  
36.96%  
19.52%  
1.53%  
66.95  
346.10  
363.50  
192.00  
15.00  
TOTAL  
144  
983.55  
Total of Item Count and Amount  
0250 22:37TM  
4-18  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
4.5.13 Day Part Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
#3001  
X25  
X_DAY_PART  
10:00TM  
Hourly Range 10:01 to 14:00  
Major Group 1  
Item Count, Amount  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
11  
13  
4
15.50  
93.00  
45.50  
52.00  
15.00  
4
1
14:00TM  
Hourly Range 14:01 to 18:00  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
01  
02  
03  
04  
16  
20  
19  
8
20.95  
145.10  
196.00  
92.00  
18:00TM  
Hourly Range 18:01 and thereafter  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
01  
02  
03  
04  
17  
16  
11  
4
30.50  
108.00  
121.76  
48.00  
0251 22:37TM  
4.5.14 Check Track (Guest Order Table) with Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
Individual Cashier Read Report Sample  
11-29-1999 MON  
#3001  
X30  
02  
X_CT_W_INDI  
2CLDYER  
#018  
Cashier Code, Cashier Name  
Order Table No., Amount remaining unpaid  
43.40  
#021  
#025  
32.50  
8.50  
TOTAL  
3
84.40  
0253 22:38TM  
4-19  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
4.5.15 Check Track (Guest Order Table) without Sales Read Report (Daily)  
Individual Cashier Read Report Sample  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_CT_WO_INDI  
#3001  
#011  
X31  
02  
Cashier Code, Cashier Name  
Reserved Order Table  
2CLDYER  
#003  
#015  
#004  
#005  
Total of reserved Order Table  
TOTAL  
5
0256 22:40TM  
4.5.16 Combo Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
Available only when the feature “Combo Sales” has been selected.  
Combo Sales Total Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_COMBO_SUM  
#3001  
X43  
COMBO TOTAL  
Combo Sales Total  
Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount  
1235.12  
423.89  
100  
0121 20:30TM  
Combo Sales Detail Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_COMBO_ALL  
#3001  
X43  
01  
COMBO1  
98.56  
Combo Code, Combo Name, Combo Sales Amount  
Operation Count, Combo Discount Amount  
9
5
21.20  
153.41  
43.00  
02  
COMBO2  
COMBO TOTAL  
1235.12  
423.89  
Combo Sales Total  
Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount  
100  
0122 20:30TM  
4-20  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
Individual Combo Sale Read Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_COMBO_INDI  
#3001  
X43  
01  
COMBO1  
98.56  
21.20  
Combo Code, Combo Name, Combo Sales Amount  
Operation Count, Combo Discount Amount  
9
COMBO TOTAL  
98.56  
21.20  
Combo Sales Total  
Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount  
9
0123 20:30TM  
4.5.17 Hourly Range Combo Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
Available only when the feature “Combo Sales” has been selected and also a combo sale table has been linked  
to each hourly range.  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_COMBO_PERI  
10:00TM  
#3001  
X44  
Hourly Range 10:01 to 11:00  
Combo Sales Amount  
COMBO TOTAL  
96.24  
9
9
41.12  
Operation Count, Combo Discount Amount  
11:00TM  
COMBO TOTAL  
100.62  
48.28  
COMBO TOTAL  
324.28  
198.22  
Combo Sales Total  
Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount  
56  
0124 20:31TM  
4-21  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
4.5.18 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Read or Reset Report (Daily, Weekly or Periodic)  
11-29-1999 MON  
#3001  
X47  
0001  
X_EMPLOYEE  
JONES  
CASHIER  
Employee Code, Employee Name  
Job Code, Job Name  
01  
CLOCK IN  
09:30  
22:30  
04:09  
08:51  
Job Start Time  
Job End Time  
Break Hours Total on each Job  
Working Hours Total on each Job  
CLOCK OUT  
TOTAL BREAK  
TOTAL HOURS  
12************************************************  
01  
CASHIER  
REGULAR HOUR  
O/T HOURS  
08:00  
00:51  
12************************************************  
Regular Working Hours on each Job  
Overtime Hours on each Job  
TOTAL  
REGULAR HOUR  
O/T HOURS  
08:00  
00:51  
Regular Working Hours Total  
Overtime Hours Total  
0005  
03  
FELDER  
COOK  
CLOCK IN  
CLOCK OUT  
TOTAL BREAK  
TOTAL HOURS  
09:33  
22:12  
00:00  
12:39  
12************************************************  
03  
COOK  
REGULAR HOUR  
O/T HOURS  
12************************************************  
08:00  
04:39  
TOTAL  
REGULAR HOUR  
O/T HOURS  
08:00  
04:39  
0251 22:37TM  
4-22  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.5 Report Sample Format  
4.5.19 Electronic Journal Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
All Electronic Journal Read or Reset Report (Daily)  
11-29-1999 MON  
X_EJ_ALL  
#3001  
#3001  
X50  
11-29-1999 MON  
***CLOCK IN  
***  
**  
1
**  
0001  
1 09:30  
0066 09:30TM  
11-29-1999 MON  
***CLOCK IN  
#3001  
***  
**  
2
**  
0002  
1 09:31  
0067 09:31TM  
11-29-1999 MON  
***CLOCK IN  
#3001  
***  
**  
3
**  
0003  
1 09:31  
0068 09:31TM  
11-29-1999 MON  
All the data stored in the electronic journal buffer memory is printed.  
#3001  
X47  
X_EMPLOYEE  
0261 22:44TM  
11-29-1999 MON  
#3001  
X248  
GTX_EMPLOYEE  
0262 22:45TM  
0263 22:45TM  
Electronic Journal (Consecutive No./Date) Read Report (Daily)  
X50  
X_EJ_CONSNO  
Data corresponding to the designated consecutive No./date is printed.  
Electronic Journal (All Guest Check) Read Report (Daily)  
X50  
X_EJ_INVOICE  
Data of all the guest checks is printed.  
Electronic Journal (Cashier/Date) Read Report (Daily)  
X50  
X_EJ_CLERK  
Data corresponding to the designated cashier/date is printed.  
4-23  
EO1-11138  
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
4.6 GT REPORTS  
Electronic Journal (Clock-in & Clock-out/Date) Read Report (Daily)  
X50  
X_EJ_EMPLOYE  
Data regarding the employee clock-in/clock-out is printed.  
Electronic Journal (Transmission History) Read Report (Daily)  
X50  
X_EJ_HISTORY  
Data of the transmission history is printed.  
4.6  
GT Reports  
The print form and items of a GT report are the same as those of its corresponding daily report, except the report  
header portion. Please also note that some items provided in the daily report are not provided in its GT reports.  
The counters and totals in a GT report are records accumulated for a certain period (week, month, etc.) while  
those counters and totals in the daily report are usually records for a day. The accumulated record data in each  
GT report will be reset when its GTZ report has been taken.  
Header Example  
X11  
X_DP_ALL  
X211  
GTX_DP_ALL  
Department Read Report (Daily)  
Department GT Read Report  
4-24  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.1 Before you enter the SET Mode  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
This chapter is provided for the store programmer or the store manager who may have to change the programmed  
data of the FS-2600 series ECR on the daily, weekly, or monthly basis. Usually, all the basic program data required  
foryourstoreshouldhavealreadybeensetbeforedeliveryoftheproductbyyourlocalTOSHIBATECrepresentative.  
However, if it becomes necessary to change or add program data, please refer to this chapter. It is also recommended  
that you read the OPERATOR’S GUIDE as well as other chapters of the MANAGER’S GUIDE in order to thoroughly  
understand the descriptions in this chapter. If there are any unclear points or program data other than listed here that  
must be changed or added, please contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative.  
WARNING!  
Never try to access a program item other than those shown in this chapter. If you access it  
and mistakenly change important data, a malfunction may occur on your completed system.  
5.1  
Before you enter the SET Mode  
Please note that you should use the REG Mode Keyboard Sheet or the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet that is proper  
for each program item. The SET Mode Keyboard Sheet is printed on the reverse side of the REG Mode  
Keyboard Sheet. Refer to the following list.  
5.1.1  
Program items that require the REG Mode Keyboard Sheet  
PLU Stock Loading and Changing (Submode 24)  
PLU Preset-code Key and Display Key Setting (Submode 27)  
PLU Preset Price Setting and Changing (Submode 60)  
%+ and %- Rate Setting  
Selective Itemizer Rate Setting  
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting  
Store/Register No. Setting  
5.1.2  
Program items that require the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet  
Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message Programming (Submode 1)  
Cashier Programming (Submode 2)  
Department Table Programming (Submode 3)  
PLU Table Setting (Submode 4)  
Time Setting and Adjustment (Submode 5)  
Date Setting and Adjustment (Submode 6)  
Hourly Range Setting (Submode 7)  
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys and Guests (Submode 8)  
Non-taxable Limit Amount and Gratuity Rate Setting (Submode 12)  
Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13)  
Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14)  
Guest File Table Setting (Submode 15)  
Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19)  
Tare Table and Scale Unit Weight Programming (Submode 26)  
PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29)  
RKP Message Programming (Submode 30)  
Display Message Programming (Submode 31)  
Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key (Submode 35)  
Set Menu Table Programming (Submode 42)  
Combo Sale Table Programming (Submode 43)  
Guest Check Commercial Message Programming (Submode 45)  
5-1  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.2 Character Entries  
Day Part Setting (Submode 46)  
Employee Table Setting (Submode 50)  
Job Code/Working Hour Setting (Submode 51)  
Tender Up Table Setting (Submode 52)  
Display Menu Table Setting (Submode 53)  
Printer Setting (Submode 71)  
5.2  
Character Entries  
Two ways are available to enter characters for the various names and messages; character code entry method  
and direct character entry method.  
CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method  
This method is to set a character by entering a Character Code and depressing the [#] key.  
DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method  
This method is to set a character by directly depressing a character key which has been printed on the SET  
mode keyboard sheet.  
5.2.1  
Character Code Entry Method  
Character Code Table  
Column Code  
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
6
7
p
q
r
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
Row  
Code  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
\
!
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
II  
III  
II  
#
$
%
&
s
t
,
1/2  
1/4  
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
D
C
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
kg  
lb  
¢
£
*
+
,
J
j
No  
x
;
K
L
[
k
l
<
=
>
?
|
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
.
^
_
~
/
|
5-2  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.2 Character Entries  
NOTE: Characters corresponding to the following codes can be used only for display but not for print.  
715, 1206, 1207, 1214, 1215, 1301, 1302, 1303, 1304, 1500, 1501, 1502, 1503, 1506, 1507, 1508,  
1509, 1510, 1512, 1513, 1514, 1515, 1305 (applicable to the TM-300 only)  
How to Set a Character  
To set a regular-sized character, enter a column code and then a row code, followed by the [#] key.  
ex.) To set “%”, enter 205 and depress [#].  
To set “kg”, enter 1508, and depress [#].  
To set a blank instead of a character, simply depress [#] without a prior code entry, or enter 200 and depress [#].  
Depress the [X] key once prior to a regular-sized character entry, and it will be a double-sized character (a  
blank will also be double-sized) .  
ex.) To set “GROUP”, “G” in double-sized, and “ROUP” in regular-sized:  
[X] 407 [#] 502 [#]  
415 [#]  
505 [#]  
500 [#]  
G
R
O
U
P
Depress the [X] key twice prior to the first character code entry to set the entire message line or entered name  
with all double-sized characters.  
ex.) To set “GROUP” all in double-sized:  
[X] [X]  
407 [#]  
502 [#]  
415 [#]  
505 [#]  
500 [#]  
G
R
O
U
P
All Double-sized Declaration  
5.2.2  
Direct Character Entry Method  
SET Mode Keyboard Sheet  
Detach the keyboard sheet frame from the register, then turn over the REG Mode Keyboard Sheet so that the  
SET Mode Keyboard Sheet printed on the reverse side can be used.  
1
2
W
S
3
E
4
R
F
C
%
:
5
T
G
V
&
+
6
Y
H
B
7
U
J
N
(
8
I
9
0
P
S
.
DOUBLE DOUBLE  
SHIFT  
Q
O
CAPS  
LOCK  
SMALL  
LOCK  
A
D
K
M
)
L
D
X
$
F
ST  
%
SPACE  
Z
X
,
!
!
-
#
$
#
=
@
1/4  
/
*
8
8
ESC  
Enter NEXT  
C
1/2  
4
5
6
Pg  
Up  
ALL ITEM OPEN Pg  
VOID CORR  
Dw  
£
7
7
7
7
7
7
¢
8
8
8
8
8
8
#
4
C
Ü
8
NS  
4
4
1
4
4
1
5
5
2
5
5
2
0 0  
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
4
1
0
5
9
6
3
X
5
3
1
2
0 0  
6
PLU  
4
00  
ST  
4
3
DP# 2  
AT/TL4  
5-3  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations  
Functions of Keys  
[DOUBLE]  
Used to enter all the characters of one line in double-size. Depress this key before all  
character entries.  
[DOUBLE SHIFT]  
Depress this key prior to a character entry, and it will be a double-sized character. The  
double-size modification using this key is effective for only one character to follow.  
[CAPS LOCK]  
[SMALL LOCK]  
[SPACE]  
Used to enter the capital-letter mode, which is held until [SMALL LOCK] is depressed.  
Used to enter the small-letter mode, which is held until the [CAPS LOCK] is depressed.  
Depress this key to enter a blank instead of a character.  
[] or [ITEM CORR]  
Depressing this key once deletes one character just entered. Subsequent depressions  
of the key will further delete the characters in the backward direction.  
[ESC]  
Used to cancel all the characters of one line just entered before the [Enter] key  
depression.  
Character Keys  
Simply depress each key corresponding to the required character. Number Keys [1] to  
[0] located on the top line of the keyboard merely function as character keys (i.e  
entered numbers are part of print descriptors but not numeric value of Program No.,  
Address No., Item Code, etc.).  
Numeric Keys [ . ], [00], [0] to [9] (located near the bottom right of the keyboard)  
These keys are used to enter codes (Program No., Address No., etc. ) . These key entries will  
not be part of descriptors.  
NOTE: You can enter a character not shown on the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet by the character code entry  
method.  
5.3  
Condition Required for Programming Operations  
At the top of each programming operation a “CONDITION” is given. Unless the register satisfies this condition,  
the programming operations will not be allowed.  
There are two types of conditions:  
“Any time outside a sale”  
It means that the programming operation is allowed when a sale is finalized before going into any other sale  
entry.  
“After ...Reset”  
It means that the designated reset report must be taken before entering the programming operation. And an  
error will result if the operation is attempted without taking the report. However, the words “After ... Reset” do  
not necessarily mean “immediately after ...”.  
When the designated reset report has already been taken and then some operations are performed in the  
SET, X, or Z mode, the condition “After ... Reset” is still satisfied and the programming operation is still  
allowed.  
On the contrary, when the designated reset report has been taken but then some sales data relating to that  
report’s output data are entered in the REG, MGR, or - mode, the programming operation will no longer be  
allowed and the same reset report must be taken.  
5-4  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Thus the condition “After ... Reset” indicates that all the sales data relating to the report data must be zero  
(except non-resettable memory data). Because of this “CONDITION” requirement, the report data will be  
protected from any inconsistencies of sales data entered in the period from a resetting of the report to another  
resetting of the same report next time.  
5.4  
How to Access a Program Item  
Same as in the X or Z mode, two ways are available to access a program item; through the operator display and  
through the keyboard.  
5.4.1  
How to Access a Program Item through the Operator Display  
When you turn the mode selector key to the SET position, the initial screens shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
1 PROGRAMMING  
2 PROGRAM READ  
3 PROGRAM DLL  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
TOTAL  
Enter  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Description of each Navigation Key  
13  
14  
15  
13  
14  
15  
1
2
3
4
5
••••*••••  
10  
••••*••••  
20••••*••••  
30••••*••••  
40  
Display Item  
Description  
1 Navigation Key 1  
Pg up  
Requests the preceding program menu screen.  
Requests the next program menu screen.  
2 Navigation Key 2  
Pg dw  
Enter  
3 Navigation Key 3  
Decides a selected item. Also decides an entered numeric value or  
character.  
4 Navigation Key 4  
Cursor Key  
Cursor key  
5 Navigation Key 5  
Example) If you want to perform the time setting or adjustment (submode 5), operate as follows.  
5-5  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Select “1 PROGRAMMING” from the initial screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The  
program menu screen shown below appears.  
SET  
PROGRAMMING  
0 MISC  
02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
8 AMOUNT LIMIT  
9 FINANCIAL  
1 STORE NAME  
2 CASHIER  
3 DEPARTMENT  
4 PLU  
5 TIME  
6 DATE  
10 PRINT L NAME  
11 SYSTEM OP1  
12 CA TAX & TIP  
13 MINOR GROUP  
14 MAJOR  
7 HOURLY  
15 CUSTOMER  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Select “5 TIME” from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below  
appears.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING TIME  
01 TIME  
12:34  
Please input data.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Enter a time value you want to set according to the guidance message “Please input data”. (In this case, 1530 for  
15:30)  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING TIME  
01 TIME  
12:34  
Please input data.  
15.30  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Depress the [AT/TL] key to finalize the setting and the screen automatically returns to the program menu screen.  
NOTES:  
1. Use the [ESC] key to return to the program menu screen after finalizing a program item “0  
MISC”. Using the [AT/TL] key in this case causes an error.  
5-6  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
2. When you obtain an open-price PLU in the PLU Table Setting (Submode 4), depress the [OPEN]  
key before the [Enter] key depression in a step to input a PLU price.  
3. If a journal printer is connected to the register, data you have just programmed will be printed on  
it. No print occurs on a receipt printer, however its data will be stored in the electronic journal  
buffer memory.  
5.4.2  
How to Access a Program Item through the Keyboard  
You can directly access a program item you want to perform through a key operation on the keyboard.  
Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message Programming (Submode 1)  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 1 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING STORE NAME  
1 STORE  
2 STORE  
3 STORE  
4 STORE  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Repeat for another line.  
1 [X]  
|Line No.| [ST]  
(For sequentially programming  
lines, the line number  
specification can be skipped.)  
1 to 4: Store Name/Message  
(for Receipt/Receipt Guest Check)  
5 to 7: Commercial Message (for Receipt)  
8 to 9: Footer Logo Message (for Receipt)  
Character Entries  
[ST]  
[AT/TL]  
max. 40 characters/line  
(See 5.2 Character  
Entries.)  
To complete  
this line  
To complete the  
programming and  
return to the program  
menu screen.  
NOTES:  
1. For each line, a maximum of 40 regular-sized characters or 20 double-sized characters may be  
entered. A combination of both types is also available.  
2. When you fill one print line with all blanks, the line will be one line space.  
3. If no commercial message is required on a receipt, fill the three print lines assigned to the  
commercial message with all blanks. As a result, no extra lines will be fed.  
4. As for the four print lines assigned to the store name/message, if you fill the area with all blanks,  
it will be four lines space.  
5. If your printer is the BRST-10 or the TM-T88, you can make and print your own logo on the store  
name/message area.  
6. When the program option “Footer Logo Message Print” is selected, a maximum of a 2-line footer  
logo message can be programmed and it will be additionally printed on a receipt issued for a  
sales transaction without an order table No. entry.  
5-7  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
ex.) To program the following draft on the first line of the store name/message area.  
R E S T A U R A N T  
T E C  
1 3 4 3  
P E A C H  
D R I V E  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 1, depress [X].  
1 [ST] RESTAURANT [DOUBLE] [SPACE] TEC [DOUBLE] [SPACE]  
1343 [SPACE] PEACH [SPACE] DRIVE [ST] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P01  
#01  
RESTAURANT  
STORE NAME  
TEC1343 PEACH DRIVE  
0409 10:29TM  
Cashier Programming (Submode 2)  
Programming  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 2 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING CASHIER  
Please input cashier code.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
5-8  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
2 [X]  
|Cashier Code| [NS]  
(NOTE 1 below)  
For Address 1: Cashier Name  
1 [ST]  
Character Entries  
[ST]  
(max. 12 characters)  
For Address 2: Cashier Status  
2 [ST]  
|Cashier Status| [#]  
Repeat for  
another  
0: Cashier for Sale Entries  
1: Cashier for Training Entries  
cashier.  
2: Cashier for All Guest Order Tables  
accessible (NOTE 2 below)  
3: -- vacant --  
4: -- vacant --  
5: Server (NOTE 3 below)  
For Address 3: Tip Rate  
3 [ST]  
|Tip Rate| [#]  
0 to 99.99 (%)  
(Use the [ . ] key if a decimal  
portion is contained in the rate.)  
(NOTE 4 below)  
For sequentially programming the  
address, the Address number  
specification can be skipped.  
[AT/TL]  
NOTES:  
1. The following table shows the Cashier Codes that can be entered. (The capacity is determined by  
the RAM Allocation Setting. ) However, the actual maximum number of the cashiers are  
preprogrammed. Therefore, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative for further information.  
Standard Memory  
1 to 15  
Expansion Memory  
Code Entry Type  
1 to 99  
---  
[CLK] Key Type  
1 to 8  
2. Cashier status 2 (Cashier for All Guest Order Tables accessible) is effective only when the  
program option “Cashier Exclusive” is selected.  
3. A cashier whose status is “server” can only take an order from a guest, but not finalize a sales  
transaction.  
4. The following shows the way to calculate the tip amount:  
Tip Amount = (Net Sale Without Tax) x (Tip Rate)  
5. For a name of each cashier, a maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters can be  
entered. A combination of both types is also available.  
5-9  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
ex.) To program the following to a cashier code 1.  
Cashier Code 1:  
Name:  
Status:  
Tip Rate:  
JONES  
5 (Server)  
3%  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 2, depress [X].  
1 [NS] 1 [ST] JONES [ST]  
(2 [ST]) 5 [#] (3 [ST]) 3 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P02  
01  
CASHIER  
01  
#01  
#02  
#03  
00004  
1CLJONES  
5
3%  
0415 11:25TM  
Deletion  
CONDITION  
After the Daily and GT Cashier Reset, (A cashier whose code is deleted must be in “Sign  
OFF” for the code entry type. Furthermore, if the program option “Employee Management  
System adopted” has been selected, the “Clock OUT” status of that cashier is necessary.)  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
Repeatable for another cashier to be deleted.  
2 [X]  
[ITEM CORR]  
|Cashier Code| [NS]  
[AT/TL]  
NOTES:  
1. The Cashier Reset Report Count of the deleted cashier is cleared.  
2. A cashier whose code has been deleted by this operation cannot perform a sign-ON nor a sales  
transaction.  
ex.) To delete the cashier code 1 “JONES”.  
Journal Print  
P02  
01  
CASHIER  
1CLJONES  
----------------------------------------  
00003  
0417 11:54TM  
5-10  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Department Table Programming (Submode 3)  
Programming  
CONDITION  
To change the Positive/Negative  
Status:  
When you enter 3 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
After Department Daily & GT  
and PLU Daily & GT Reset  
To change any other programmed  
data or to program new departments:  
Any time outside a sale  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING DEPARTMENT  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
DP  
DP  
DP  
DP  
DP  
DP  
DP  
DP  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
Please input Department code.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
As for details of each Address,  
refer to the following pages.  
(NOTE 2 on the next page.)  
Barcode Scanning  
3 [X]  
|Address Nos| [#]  
|Department Code|  
[DP#]  
(NOTE 1 on the next page.)  
for sequential-coded Dept. only  
Submode No.  
Address 1: Link Group  
|Major GP| |Minor GP| [#]  
(01 to 10) (01 to 30)  
1 [ST]  
Address 2: Department Name  
Character Entries [ST]  
max. 16 characters  
2 [ST]  
Operation  
procedure  
surrounded  
by this line  
is the same  
as the  
operation in  
Submode 4.  
Address 3: Status 1  
|Status Code to ON| [#]  
3 [ST]  
Address 4: Status 2  
Repeat for any  
|Status Code to ON| [#]  
address within  
the same dept.  
by re-entry for  
correction.  
4 [ST]  
Address 5: Tax Status  
|Tax Code| [#]  
(NOTE 2)  
5 [ST]  
Address 6: High Amount Limit  
Repeat for  
other  
departments.  
|High Amount to be locked out| [#]  
6 [ST]  
(max. 7 digits)  
Address 7: Low Amount Limit  
|Low Amount to be locked out| [#]  
7 [ST]  
(max. 7 digits)  
Address 8: Takeout Tax Status  
|Takeout Tax Code| [#]  
8 [ST]  
[ST]  
[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)  
Executes DLL.  
5-11  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
NOTES:  
1. The “Address Nos” designation at the top after “3 [X]” can be skipped if not necessary. If entered,  
the designated Address (es) will be automatically accessed after the department designation. For  
example, if you enter |0204| [#] here (designate each address by entering a two-digit code; 01  
for Address 1, 02 for Address 2, you will then enter:  
Dept Code + [DP#] key,  
Character Entries [ST] (“2 [ST]” can be skipped), then  
Status Code for Status 2 Selection [#] (“4 [ST]” can be skipped), then you  
may go on to another department setting for the same address designations.  
But still in this case, you can go to other addresses by first entering the Address No. and  
depressing [ST]. The Address Designation feature may be useful when you want to program or  
change contents of only one or two specific Addresses of multiple departments. (For example,  
when you want to change only the names, but not any other programmed contents, of 15  
departments.)  
2. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (if the Address Designation  
feature has not been used), the Address No. and the following [ST] can be omitted.  
3. The programming contents of each address are further described in the DEPARTMENT TABLE  
PROGRAMMING CONTENTS below.  
DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
1
Linked Group Code  
Enter a 4-digit code, composed of a 2-digit Major Group Code and 2-digit Minor Group Code.  
| | | [#]  
|
Minor Group Code 01 to 30  
Major Group Code 01 to 10  
ex.) To link Major Group No. 1 and Minor Group No. 1:  
Enter: (0)  
1
0
1
Major Group  
Code  
Minor Group  
Code  
Enter 00 when the department is not linked to  
any Minor Gruop.  
Enter 0 (or 00) when the department is not linked to any Major  
Group.  
NOTE: The “Major Group” and “Minor Group” here are merely names for those two grouping  
total memories. In the memory process, those two totals are independent from the  
other and no logical check is made for a combination of the Major and Minor group  
codes to be linked to each department. In other words, you may regard them as “A”  
grouping and “B” grouping. See the examples on the next page:  
-- Continued on next page --  
5-12  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
-- Continued --  
Major-Minor Grouping Method Example:  
(In this case, you should check the logical linkage between the Major Groups and Minor  
Groups.)  
Major GP 01  
Major GP 02  
Minor  
GP01  
Minor  
GP02  
Minor  
GP03  
Minor  
GP04  
Minor  
GP05  
DP01  
0101  
DP02  
0101  
DP04  
0102  
DP06  
0103  
DP07  
0103  
DP10  
0204  
DP11  
0204  
DP14  
0205  
DP16  
0205  
Linked Group Code in setting  
“A” Grouping and “B” Grouping Method Example:  
(In this case, you may think that each department data are processed into max. 2 different  
types of groupings.)  
A-GP  
01  
A-GP  
02  
A-GP  
03  
B-GP  
01  
B-GP  
02  
B-GP  
03  
DP01  
0100  
DP02  
0100  
DP04  
0201  
DP06  
0301  
DP07  
0300  
DP10  
0302  
DP11  
0002  
DP14  
0003  
DP16  
0003  
DP17  
0002  
Linked Group Code in setting  
Department Name  
2
Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters. See the section 5.2  
Character Entries. End with [ST].  
When no name is programmed for a department, the following will be the auto-program name  
(initial setting) for printing:  
D P  
xx  
Department Code 01 to 99  
double-sized characters  
-- Continued on next page --  
5-13  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
-- Continued --  
3
Status 1 Selection  
Enter the Status Codes 1 to 3 of which status must be set to ON. More than one  
code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.  
Status  
Item  
Selective Status  
Code  
OFF  
ON  
1
2
3
Receipt Type  
Single  
Ordinary  
Positive  
Double  
Ordinary or Other Income Dept.  
Positive or Negative Dept.  
Other Income  
Negative  
NOTE: The selection of Status Code 1 (Receipt Print Type) is effective only when the  
program option “Receipt Single/Double Print” has been selected.  
Setting Examples:  
To set only Status 2 to ON ................ Enter 2 [#]  
To set Statuses 1, 2 to ON................ Enter 12 [#]  
To set none of statuses to ON .......... Enter 0 [#]  
4
Status 2 Selection  
Enter Status Codes 5 to 8 of which status must be set to ON. More than one  
code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.  
Status  
Item  
Selective Status  
Code  
OFF  
ON  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
5
6
7
8
Output to RKP-1?  
Output to RKP-2?  
Output to RKP-3?  
Output to RKP-4?  
No  
No  
No  
No  
5
Tax Status  
Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Tax.  
| [#]  
|
|
|
|
Tax Status  
0: Non-taxable  
1: Tax 1  
2: Tax 2  
3: Tax 3  
4: Tax 4  
(More than one code can be entered for combining 1 to 4 taxable status. For  
example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)  
-- Continued on next page --  
5-14  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
-- Continued --  
6
7
8
High Amount Limit  
Enter a maximum of 7 digits to be set as the high amount to be locked out.  
ex.) To prohibit any amount equal to or larger than $40.00:  
4000 [#]  
(Allows any amount equal to or smaller than $39.99.)  
NOTES: 1. To cancel the preset limit (i.e. to allow any amount), enter 0.  
2. The limit amount set here will be applied to entries in REG mode only, but not  
in MGR or - mode.  
3. Zeros must be entered as all the digits other than the highest digit.  
If any other value is entered, it will be regarded as a zero.  
ex.) Entering 4001 to 4999 will all result in setting 4000.  
Low Amount Limit  
Enter a maximum of 7 digits to be set as the low amount limit.  
ex.) To allow any amount equal to or larger than $4.00:  
400 [#]  
(Allows any amount equal to or larger than $4.00.)  
NOTES: 1. To cancel the preset limit (i.e. to allow any amount), enter 0.  
2. The limit amount set here will be applied to entries in REG mode only, but not  
in MGR or - mode.  
3. Zeros must be entered as all the digits other than the highest digit.  
If any other value is entered, it will be regarded as a zero.  
ex.) Entering 401 to 499 will all result in setting 400.  
Takeout Tax Status Setting  
This tax status is applied to a takeout transaction when the program option “Takeout feature”  
has been selected. (For an eat-in transaction, a tax status which has been programmed in  
Address 5 is applied.)  
Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Takeout Tax.  
| [#]  
|
|
|
|
0: Non-taxable  
1: Tax 1  
2: Tax 2  
3: Tax 3  
4: Tax 4  
(More than one code can be entered for combining 1 to 4 taxable status. For  
example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)  
5-15  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
NOTE: You can use a maximum of 99 departments. The memories of the departments 1 to 30 have already  
been opened before delivery of the register.  
If you want to open a memory and use a department other than the departments 1 to 30, enter a  
department code you want to designate, then depress the [DP#] key in the key sequence of the  
Department Table Programming. The memory of the department will be opened automatically.  
When you only want to open a memory other than the departments 1 to 30, operate as follows.  
3 [X]  
|Department Code| [DP#]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable for another department  
ex.) To program the following to a department code 1.  
Department Code 1:  
Address 1 (Major Group/Minor Group):  
Address 2 (Name):  
03/11  
VEGETABLE  
Address 3 (Status 1):  
Address 4 (Status 2):  
Address 5 (Tax Status):  
Address 6 (High Amount Limit):  
Address 7 (Low Amount Limit):  
0 (no ON-status)  
7 (Sales data outputted to RKP3)  
2 (Tax 2 taxable)  
5000 ($50.00)  
100 ($1.00)  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 3, depress [X].  
1 [DP#] 1 [ST] 0311 [#] (2 [ST]) VEGETABLE [ST]  
(3 [ST]) 0 [#] (4 [ST]) 7 [#] (5 [ST]) 2 [#] (6 [ST]) 5000 [#] (7 [ST]) 100 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P03  
DEPARTMENT  
01 DP  
#01  
01  
0311  
#02 DP  
#03  
#04  
#05  
01VEGETABLE  
0
7
2
#06  
#07  
50.00  
1.00  
0433 16:35TM  
Deletion  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
After Department Daily & GT and PLU Daily and GT Reset  
Mode Lock: SET  
Individual Department Deletion  
3 [X] [ITEM CORR]  
|Department Code| [DP#]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable for another department to be deleted.  
All Department Deletion  
3 [X] [ITEM CORR]  
[ALL VOID]  
[AT/TL]  
5-16  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)  
This submode can be operated when new PLU items are to be added, PLU program data is to be changed, or  
PLUs are to be deleted.  
Programming or Changing  
CONDITION  
To program new PLUs or to change  
any programmed contents of PLUs  
except the following case:  
When you enter 4 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
Any time outside a sale  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING PLU  
To change the linked Department  
of a PLU with sales data not zero:  
After PLU Reset  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
Please input PLU code.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
As for details of each Address,  
refer to the following pages.  
(NOTE 2 on the next page.)  
Barcode Scanning  
4 [X]  
|Address Nos| [#]  
|PLU Code|  
[PLU]  
(NOTE 1 on the next page.)  
for sequential-coded item only  
Submode No.  
Address 1: Link Department  
|Department Code| [#]  
(1 to 99)  
1
[ST]  
Address 2: PLU Name  
Character Entries [ST]  
max. 16 characters  
2
[ST]  
Operation  
procedure  
surrounded  
by this line  
is the same  
as the  
Address 3: 1st Preset Price  
|Price| [#]  
(max. 6 digits)  
3
[ST]  
Address 4: 2nd Preset Price  
Repeat for any  
address within  
the same PLU  
by re-entry for  
correction.  
|Price| [#]  
(max. 6 digits)  
operation in  
Submode 4.  
4
[ST]  
Address 5: 3rd Preset Price  
|Price| [#]  
(max. 6 digits)  
(NOTE 3)  
5
[ST]  
Address 6: 4th Preset Price  
Repeat for  
other  
PLUs.  
|Price| [#]  
(max. 6 digits)  
6
[ST]  
Address 7: 5th Preset Price  
|Price| [#]  
(max. 6 digits)  
7
[ST]  
Address 8: PLU Status 1  
|Status Code to ON| [#]  
8
[ST]  
Address 9: PLU Status 2  
|Status Code to ON| [#]  
9
[ST]  
Address 10: Tax Status  
|Tax Code| [#]  
10 [ST]  
Address 11: PLU Group  
|PLU Group Code| [#]  
11 [ST]  
(1 to 99)  
Address 12: Set Menu Table  
|Set Menu Table No.| [#]  
12 [ST]  
(1 to 50)  
Address 13: Display Menu Table  
|Display Menu Table No.| [#]  
13 [ST]  
(max. 10 digits)  
Address 14: Stock Quantity  
|Stock Quantity| [#]  
(0 to 9999.99)  
14 [ST]  
Address 15: Minimum Stock Quantity  
|Minimum Stock Quantity| [#]  
15 [ST]  
(0 to 9999.99)  
Address 16: Takeout Tax Status  
|Tax Code| [#]  
(max. 4 digits)  
16 [ST]  
Address 17: Tare Table  
|Tare Table No.| [#]  
17 [ST]  
1 to 9  
Address 18: Unit Weight  
|Unit Weight Table| [#]  
18 [ST]  
1 to 11  
[ST]  
[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)  
Executes DLL.  
5-17  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
NOTES:  
1. The “Address Nos” designation at the top after “4 [X]” can be skipped if not necessary. If entered,  
the designated Address (es) will automatically be accessed after the PLU Code designation.  
2. A maximum of 2500 PLUs are programmable (varies depending on the capacity and allocation of  
the RAM) . The “[PLU]” key here indicates the key labeled simply as “PLU” but not any PLU  
Preset-code Keys.  
3. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (if the Address Designation  
feature has not been used), the Address No. and the following [ST] can be omitted.  
PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
1
Linked Department Code  
Enter the 2-digit code of the department to which the PLU is linked. When a new PLU is  
programmed, this entry is compulsory (an error will result if this entry is skipped.)  
|
|
| [#]  
1 to 99  
2
PLU Name  
Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters. See the section 5.2  
Character Entries. End with [ST].  
When no name is programmed for a PLU, the following will be the auto-program name for  
printing:  
PLUxxxxxx  
PLU Code  
3
4
1st Preset Price  
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].  
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)  
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.  
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an  
open PLU (open-price PLU).  
2nd Preset Price  
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].  
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)  
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.  
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an  
open PLU (open-price PLU).  
If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as  
the 2nd preset price.  
5
6
3rd Preset Price  
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].  
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)  
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.  
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an  
open PLU (open-price PLU).  
If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as  
the 3rd preset price.  
4th Preset Price  
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].  
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)  
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.  
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an  
open PLU (open-price PLU).  
If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as  
the 4th preset price.  
-- Continued on next page --  
5-18  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
-- Continued --  
7
8
5th Preset Price  
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].  
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)  
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.  
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an  
open PLU (open-price PLU).  
If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as  
the 5th preset price.  
Status 1 Selection  
Enter the Status Codes 1 to 7 of which status must be set to ON. More than one code  
may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.  
Status  
Item  
Selective Status  
Code  
OFF  
ON  
Stock  
Yes  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Stock Process  
Non-stock  
No  
Net to S.I. 1?  
Net to S.I. 2?  
No  
Yes  
-- vacant --  
Modifier Entry for this PLU  
This PLU is used as:  
Lock or Unlock?  
Prohibited  
Menu item  
Allowed  
Modifier item  
Unlock (in use) Lock (not in use)  
Setting Examples:  
To set only Status 2 to ON ................ Enter 2 [#]  
To set Statuses 2, 3, 7 to ON............ Enter 237 [#]  
To set none of statuses to ON .......... Enter 0 [#]  
9
Status 2 Selection  
Enter the Status Codes 1 to 5 of which status must be set to ON. More than one code  
may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.  
Status  
Item  
Scale Entry  
Selective Status  
Code  
OFF  
ON  
1
2
3
Prohibited  
Optional  
Compulsory  
Manual Tare Entry  
Compulsory  
Canada Tax Symbol Print  
(NOTE below)  
Non-print  
Print (A symbol “F”)  
4
5
Combo Exemption Flag  
No  
Exemption  
Using the [CODE SHIFT]  
Possible  
Not possible  
key for this PLU  
NOTES: 1. Canada tax symbol is assigned as follows.  
“T” for the PST, “F” for the GST  
2. Status Code 1 (Scale Entry) and Status Code 1 (Stock Process) of the  
preceding address cannot be combined with one PLU.  
-- Continued on next page --  
5-19  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
-- Continued --  
10  
Tax Status  
Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Tax.  
| [#]  
|
|
|
|
0: Non-taxable  
1: Tax 1 (Tax 1 taxable)  
2: Tax 2  
3: Tax 3  
4: Tax 4  
(More than one code can be entered for combining Tax 1 to Tax 4 taxable status. For  
example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)  
NOTE: When a tax status has not been programmed to a PLU in this address, the tax status  
of the PLU is determined by that of a linked department.  
11  
12  
PLU Group No. (for purposes of reports)  
Enter a 2-digit code (1 to 99) as a PLU Group No. to which the PLU belongs, and  
depress [#]. To cancel the Group No. once set, enter 0 and depress [#].  
Set Menu Table No.  
|
|
| [#]  
1 to 50  
Enter the Set Menu Table No. (1 to 50), and depress [#]. The sub menu PLUs which link to  
each table will be set later in a separate operation (Submode 42).  
13  
Display Menu Table  
Enter a Display Menu Table No. which is programmed in the Submode 53 (Display Menu  
Table Setting), then depress the [#] key. A maximum of 5 display menu table Nos. (max.  
10 digit-value) can be entered. Enter 0, then depress the [#] key to cancel the display  
menu table.  
NOTE: When you enter the display menu tables of which Nos. are 1 to 9, add 0 before the  
number.  
ex.) When you want to program the display menu tables 1 and 2, enter 0102, then  
depress the [#] key.  
14  
15  
Stock Quantity (applicable when Status Code 1 has been entered in Address 8)  
Enter the stock quantity of the PLU in max. 6 digits (0 to 9999.99). Use the [ . ] key if any  
decimal portion is contained.  
|
|
|
|
| [ . ] |  
|
| [#]  
0 to 9999.99  
The entered quantity will replace the existing stock quantity value, if any.  
Minimum Stock Quantity (applicable when Status Code 1 of Address 8 has been set to ON  
and the Stock Quantity of Address 14 has been entered.)  
Enter the minimum stock quantity of the PLU in max. 6 digits (0 to 9999.99; use the [ . ]  
key if any decimal portion is contained.)  
|
|
|
|
| [ . ] |  
|
| [#]  
0 to 9999.99  
By setting a Minimum Stock Quantity value here, a short tone for warning will be generated  
on entering a sale entry of this PLU to turn the stock quantity less than the preset minimum  
stock quantity value.  
-- Continued on next page --  
5-20  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
-- Continued --  
16  
Takeout Tax Status Setting  
This tax status is applied to a takeout transaction when the program option “Takeout feature”  
has been selected. (For an eat-in transaction, a tax status which has been programmed in  
Address 10 is applied.)  
Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Takeout Tax.  
| [#]  
|
|
|
|
0: Non-taxable  
1: Tax 1  
2: Tax 2  
3: Tax 3  
4: Tax 4  
(More than one code can be entered for combining 1 to 4 taxable status. For  
example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)  
NOTE: When a tax status has not been programmed to a PLU in this address, the tax status  
of the PLU is determined by that of a linked department.  
17  
Tare Table No. (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only)  
|
| [#]  
Enter the Tare Table No. (1 to 9). The content of each Tare Table is set later in a separate  
operation (Submode 26). In a scale item entry of a PLU with a Tare Table No. set, the tare  
weight preset in the Tare Table will automatically be subtracted from the total weight read  
from the scale. Enter 0 to cancel a Tare Table No. once set. Or skip this address setting for  
PLUs not needing any tare weight calculations.  
18  
Individual PLU Unit Weight Table Code (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only)  
|
|
| [#]  
LB unit  
Kg unit  
0:  
General Unit Weight (set in Submode 26)  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
1 LB  
2 LB  
3 LB  
4 LB  
5 LB  
6 LB  
7 LB  
8 LB  
9 LB  
1/2 LB  
1/4 LB  
1 Kg  
2 Kg  
3 Kg  
4 Kg  
5 Kg  
6 Kg  
7 Kg  
8 Kg  
9 Kg  
9:  
10:  
11:  
100 g  
not applicable  
NOTE: Whether the ECR adopts the LB or Kg unit system is determined by a program option  
selection.  
5-21  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
ADDITIONAL NOTES  
If a PLU is linked to an Other Income Department, the PLU is automatically set as Other Income PLU.  
If a PLU is linked to a negative Department, the PLU is automatically set as negative PLU.  
Amount Limits (High Amount, Low Amount) of each open-price PLU will be determined by those of its link  
department.  
Receipt type (Itemized receipt or Single/Double receipt) of each PLU will be determined by those of its link  
department.  
Whether or not each PLU data is output to the Remote Kitchen Printers will be determined by the status of its link  
department.  
ex.) To program the following to a PLU code 20.  
PLU Code 20: Address 1 (Link Department):  
Address 2 (Name):  
2
CHEESE BURGER  
Address 3 (1st Price):  
$2.00  
Address 4 (2nd Price):  
$1.80  
Address 8 (Status 1):  
5 (Condiment Entry Allowed)  
Address 10 (Tax Status):  
12 (Tax 1 & 2 taxable)  
Address 11 (PLU Group):  
3
Address 12 (Set Menu Table No.):  
Address 13 (Display Menu Table No.):  
Address 16 (Takeout Tax Status):  
1
03 (Table 3)  
1 (Tax 1 taxable)  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 4, depress [X].  
20 [PLU] 1 [ST] 2 [#] (2 [ST]) CHEESE BURGER [ST]  
(3 [ST]) 200 [#] (4 [ST]) 180 [#] 8 [ST] 5 [#] 10 [ST] 12 [#] (11 [ST]) 3 [#] (12 [ST]) 1 [#]  
(13 [ST]) 03 [#] 16 [ST] 1 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P04  
PLU  
000020  
#01  
#02  
PLU000020  
02  
CHEESE BURGER  
#03  
#04  
#08  
2.00@  
1.80@  
5
#10  
#11  
#12  
#13  
12  
03  
01  
03  
1
#16  
00013  
0003 10:17TM  
5-22  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Deletion  
CONDITION  
To delete a PLU with sales data of zero: Any time outside a sale  
To delete a PLU with sales data of not zero: After PLU Reset  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
Individual PLU Deletion  
4 [X] [ITEM CORR]  
|PLU Code| [PLU]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted.  
ex.) To delete PLU Code 120001 that was once programmed:  
Journal Print  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 4, depress [X].  
[ITEM CORR] 120001 [PLU]  
[AT/TL]  
P04 PLU  
120001  
PLU120001  
----------------------------------------  
00013  
0006 10:24TM  
All PLU Deletion  
4 [X]  
[ITEM CORR]  
[ALL VOID]  
[AT/TL]  
PLU Programmed Data Copying  
This operation is used to copy the programmed data of a PLU item and to use it in programming another PLU  
item, thus eliminating time in PLU programming operation.  
CONDITION  
To program new PLUs or to change any programmed contents of PLUs:  
Any time outside a sale (except the following case)  
To change the PLU of the copy-destination with sales data not zero:  
After PLU Reset  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
4 [X]  
|PLU Code of the copy-destination| [PLU]  
[NS]  
|PLU Code of the copy-source| [PLU]  
The programmed data of the copy-source PLU is now copied to the copy-destination PLU  
(except the PLU Code). Then follow the procedure on the page of Programming or  
Changing to change data of any required Addresses.  
ex.) To program the PLU Code 22 (BIG CHEESE BURGER) by copying the programmed data of the PLU Code  
20 (CHEESE BURGER).  
Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress [X]  
22 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-destination)  
[NS]  
20 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-source)  
2 [ST] BIG CHEESEBURGER [ST] (Address 2, Name changed into: BIG CHEESEBURGER)  
(3 [ST]) 300 [#] (Address 3, the 1st price changed into: $3.00)  
(4 [ST]) 250 [#] (Address 4, the 2nd price changed into: $2.50)  
[AT/TL]  
5-23  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Journal Print  
P04  
PLU  
000022  
#00 000020  
CHEESE BURGER  
#02  
#03  
#04  
BIG CHEESEBURGER  
3.00@  
2.50@  
00002  
0011 10:58TM  
Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5)  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 5 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING TIME  
01 TIME  
12:34  
Please input data.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
5 [X]  
|Hour|  
|Minute|  
[AT/TL]  
(0 to 23) (00 to 59)  
ex.) To set the time to “1:35 p.m. (13:35)”:  
Mode Lock to SET, enter 5, depress [X].  
Enter 1335, depress [AT/TL].  
Journal Print  
P05  
TIME  
13:35TM  
0012 13:35TM  
NOTE: If an hour value of more than 23 or a minute value of more than 59 is entered, it will result in an error.  
The current date will not be changed by setting or adjusting the time.  
5-24  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6)  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 6 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING DATE  
01 DATE  
THURSDAY  
02-11-1999  
Please input data.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
6 [X]  
|Day-of-Week Code|  
|Month|  
(01 to 12)  
|Day|  
|Year|  
[AT/TL]  
(01 to 31) (1999, etc.)  
0: SUN (Sunday)  
1: MON (Monday)  
2: TUE (Tuesday)  
3: WED (Wednesday)  
4: THU (Thursday)  
5: FRI (Friday)  
6: SAT (Saturday)  
ex.) To set the date to Tuesday, 21st of December, 1999:  
Mode Lock: SET, enter 6, depress [X]  
Enter 212211999, depress [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P06  
DATE  
TUESDAY  
12-21-1999  
0014 13:37TM  
NOTES:  
1. A program option allows you to select the date order as follows.  
Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)  
Day-Month-Year  
Year-Month-Day  
2. The Day-of-week is programmable not to be printed on receipts.  
5-25  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Hourly Range Setting (Submode 7)  
A maximum of 48 hourly ranges can be set. You can obtain sales data by each hourly range, also you can  
designate a price level and a menu level for each day of the week.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
After Hourly Range Reset and  
Combo Sale Hourly Range Reset  
When you enter 7 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
Mode Lock: SET  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING HOURLY  
00:00  
00:00  
00:00  
00:00  
00:00  
00:00  
00:00  
00:00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Address 1: Start Time  
|Hour| |Minute| [#]  
0 to 23 00 to 59  
7 [X]  
|Hourly Range| [NS]  
1 [ST]  
1 to 48  
Address 2: Price Level and Menu  
Level for Sunday  
Submode No.  
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]  
2 [ST]  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
Address 3: Price Level and Menu  
Level for Monday  
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]  
3 [ST]  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
Address 4: Price Level and Menu  
Level for Tuesday  
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]  
4 [ST]  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
Address 5: Price Level and Menu  
Level for Wednesday  
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]  
5 [ST]  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
Address 6: Price Level and Menu  
Level for Thursday  
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]  
6 [ST]  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
Address 7: Price Level and Menu  
Level for Friday  
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]  
7 [ST]  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
Address 8: Price Level and Menu  
Level for Saturday  
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]  
8 [ST]  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
Repeat until all the hourly ranges you want to set are entered. (max. 48 hourly ranges)  
[AT/TL]  
NOTES:  
1. When you enter only a 1-digit code (1 to 5) for a price & menu level portion, the price level of  
which code is entered will be designated.  
2. Do not set an hourly range across 24:00, such as “from 23:00 to 1:00”. If set, no data will be  
processed into that hourly range.  
3. To reset the hourly range table once set, operate as follows.  
7 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL]  
5-26  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
ex.) To set the following to a hourly range 1.  
Hourly Range 1:  
Address 1 (Start Time):  
Address 2 (Sunday):  
Address 3 (Monday):  
Address 4 (Tuesday):  
Address 5 (Wednesday):  
Address 6 (Thursday):  
Address 7 (Friday):  
1000 (10:00)  
55 (Menu Level 5/Price Level 5)  
11 (Menu Level 1/Price Level 1)  
12 (Menu Level 1/Price Level 2)  
13 (Menu Level 1/Price Level 3)  
23 (Menu Level 2/Price Level 3)  
34 (Menu Level 3/Price Level 4)  
45 (Menu Level 4/Price Level 5)  
Address 8 (Saturday):  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 7, depress [X].  
1 [NS] 1 [ST] 1000 [#] (2 [ST]) 55 [#] (3 [ST]) 11 [#] (4 [ST]) 12 [#] (5 [ST]) 13 [#] (6 [ST]) 23 [#]  
(7 [ST]) 34 [#] (8 [ST]) 45 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P07  
HOURLY  
01#00  
#01  
#02  
#03  
#04  
#05  
#06  
#07  
#08  
10:00TM  
10:00TM  
55  
11  
12  
13  
23  
34  
45  
0069 19:06TM  
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8)  
This programming is used to set a high or low amount limit for the items shown in the following list.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 8 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING AMOUNT LIMIT  
01 AT/TL  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
02 CHK  
03 Chg  
04 MISC  
05 CPN  
06 CREDIT1  
07 CREDIT2  
08 CREDIT3  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
8 [X]  
|Key Code| [ST]  
|Amount Limit| [#]  
Max. 8 digits; 0 to reset  
(Max. 7 digits for Key Codes 11 and 12)  
[AT/TL]  
(See the list on  
the next page.)  
Repeat for another key item.  
5-27  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Key  
Item or Key to be applied  
Key  
Item or Key to be applied  
Code  
Code  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[AT/TL] (Cash Tender)  
8
[CREDIT 3] (Credit 3 Tender)  
[CREDIT 4] (Credit 4 Tender)  
[CREDIT 5] (Credit 5 Tender)  
High Amount Limit common to all depts.  
Low Amount Limit common to all depts.  
[CHECK] (Check Tender)  
[Chg] (Charge Tender)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
[MISC] (Misc. Tender)  
[CPN] (Media-Coupon Tender)  
[CREDIT 1] (Credit 1 Tender)  
[CREDIT 2] (Credit 2 Tender)  
Charge Posting Limit Amount  
common to all customers  
ex.) To set a tender limit amount $100.00 on the [CHECK] key  
Journal Print  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 8, depress [X].  
2 [ST] 10000 [#] [AT/TL]  
P08  
#02  
AMOUNT LIMIT  
CHECK  
100.00  
0022 18:04TM  
NOTES:  
1. If the individual High or Low Amount Limit of a department has been set, it prevails over the  
Common High or Low Limit for all departments here.  
2. The Amount Limit Set Value of each tender media is the high amount limit and is effective only  
when the media key is used for tendering but not when used as total key.  
Non-taxable Amount Limit Setting (for Canada)/Gratuity Rate Setting (Submode 12)  
This programming is used to set a non-taxable amount limit applied to Ontario, Canada. It is also used to set a  
gratuity rate.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
After Daily Financial Reset  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 12 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING CA TAX & TIP  
01 CANADA TAX  
0.00  
0%  
02 GRATUITY  
Please input data.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
12 [X]  
1 [ST]  
|Non-taxable Limit Amount| [#]  
Max. 4 digits  
*
(1 to 9999; 0 to reset)  
2 [ST]  
|Gratuity Rate| [#]  
0.001 to 99.999%; use the [ . ] key  
if a decimal portion is contained.  
[AT/TL]  
*
When a gratuity rate only is programmed  
5-28  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
ex.) To set the following  
Journal Print  
Non-taxable Amount Limit: $20.00  
Gratuity Rate: 5%  
P12  
CANADA TAX  
GRATUITY  
CA TAX & TIP  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 12, depress [X].  
1 [ST] 2000 [#] (2 [ST]) 5 [#] [AT/TL]  
20.00  
5%  
0028 20:10TM  
Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13)  
This programming is used to set each minor group name. Association among a department, a minor group  
and a major group should be set in the Department Table Programming (Submode 3).  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 13 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING MINOR GROUP  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
GP  
GP  
GP  
GP  
GP  
GP  
GP  
GP  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
13 [X]  
|Minor Group Code| [ST]  
Character Entries  
(See NOTE)  
[ST]  
[AT/TL]  
(1 to 30)  
*
Repeat for other groups  
(max. 30 groups)  
* (For sequentially programming Group Codes  
and Names, the code specification can be skipped.)  
ex.) To set “GREENSTUFF” for a minor group1  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 13, depress [X].  
1 [ST] GREENSTUFF [ST] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P13  
01  
MINOR GROUP  
GREENSTUFF  
0029 20:29TM  
NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized characters may be set for each Minor Group name. One double-sized  
character occupies two regular-sized character’s space. Also see the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the  
beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a Minor Gruop, an auto-preset data is assigned  
as the Minor Group Name (GPxx; xx = Minor Group Code 01 to 30).  
5-29  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14)  
This programming is used to set each major group name. Association among a department, a minor group  
and a major group should be set in the Department Table Programming (Submode 3).  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 14 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING MAJOR  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
MGP  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
14 [X]  
|Major Group Code| [ST]  
Character Entries  
(See NOTE)  
[ST]  
[AT/TL]  
(1 to 10)  
*
Repeat for other groups  
(max. 10 groups)  
* (For sequentially programming Group Codes  
and Names, the code specification can be skipped.)  
ex.) To set “OTHER” for a major group10  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 14, depress [X].  
10 [ST] OTHER [ST] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P14  
10  
MAJOR  
OTHER  
0030 20:48TM  
NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized characters may be set for each Major Group name. One double-sized  
character occupies two regular-sized character’s space. Also see the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the  
beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a Major Group, an auto-preset data is assigned  
as the Major Group Name (MGPxx; xx = Major Group Code 01 to 10).  
5-30  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Customer File Table Setting (Submode 15)  
This programming is used to set a customer file table(customer code, customer name, limit amount and price  
level), which is used for the charge posting transaction.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 15 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING CUSTOMER  
Please input customer code.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Customer Card Reading through the MCR  
Address 1: Customer Name  
Character Entries [ST]  
Max. 16 characters  
15 [X]  
|Customer File Code| [NS]  
Max. 12 digits  
1 [ST]  
Address 2: Charge Posting Limit  
Amount for each Customer  
Submode No.  
|Charge Posting Limit Amount| [#]  
2 [ST]  
Max. 8 digits  
Address 3: Price Level for each  
Customer  
|Price Level| [#]  
3 [ST]  
1 to 5  
Repeat for another Customer file.  
[AT/TL]  
ex.) To program the following to a customer file code 5.  
Customer File Code 5:  
Address 1 (Customer Name): SHEARER  
Address 2 (Limit Amount):  
Address 3 (Price Level):  
$500.00  
2
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 15, depress [X].  
5 [NS] 1 [ST] SHEARER [ST] (2 [ST]) 50000 [#] (3 [ST]) 2 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P15 CUSTOMER  
000000000005  
#01  
#02  
#03  
SHEARER  
500.00  
2
00006  
0034 12:56TM  
NOTES:  
1. A maximum of 5000 customer file tables can be used.  
2. When a charge posting limit amount is set for each customer in this programming, it prevails over  
the common limit amount programmed in the Submode 8.  
5-31  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19)  
This programming is used to make a combination report table which is described in the section 4.3  
Combination Reports on page 4-9.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 19 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING COMBI REPORT  
01  
02  
03  
1103000000  
0000000000  
0000000000  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
19 [X]  
|Table No.| [ST]  
|Report Code| [#]  
[ST]  
[AT/TL]  
1 to 3  
3 to 48 (See the Report  
Code Table below), or 0  
to delete the table.  
*
Repeatable for max. five different reports  
combination.  
Repeat for other tables.  
* (For sequentially programming Tables, the  
Table No. specification can be skipped.)  
Report Code Table  
Report  
Code  
Report Name  
Mode for output  
X
*
Z
*
GTX GTZ  
3
4
Financial  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
All Cashier  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
6
Credit Card Company Sales  
Department Group  
8
9
Each Media Sales and In-drawer Total  
Hourly Range  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
24  
*
*
All Department  
*
*
*
*
All Media Sales and Cash-in-drawer  
All PLU Sales  
*
All PLU Stock  
All Customer File  
*
*
PLU Group  
*
*
*: output  
Blank: no output  
5-32  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Report Code Table  
Report Name  
Report  
Code  
Mode for output  
X
*
Z
*
GTX GTZ  
25  
30  
31  
43  
44  
47  
48  
Day Part  
Check Track with Sales  
Check Track without Sales  
Combo Sales  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Hourly Combo Sales  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out (periodic)  
*
*
*
*
*: output  
Blank: no output  
ex.) To program the following reports to a combination report table 1.  
3: Financial  
4: All Cashier  
47 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 19, depress [X].  
1 [ST] 3 [#] 4 [#] 47 [#] [ST] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P19  
#01  
COMBI REPORT  
0304470000  
0035 13:38TM  
NOTES:  
1. When changes are made on report combination in a table, entirely or partially, program all the  
reports in that table again.  
2. An error will result if a Report Code that has already been entered is attempted to enter again in  
the same table.  
3. In Table No.1, auto-preset report combination of Report 11 (All Depts) and Report 3 (Financial) is  
programmed. It will be active as Table No.1 content unless no data are programmed for Table  
No.1.  
5-33  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
PLU Stock Loading or Changing (Submode 24)  
This submode loads or changes the stock quantities of PLUs with the Stock-process status, as part of stock  
controls. The stock of a PLU may be entered initially in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation  
(Submode 4), and may be adjusted in this operation, from day to day, as the stock increases due to delivery  
from wholesalers, etc. or as the stock decreases due to damages or losses.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 24 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING STOCK  
000001 PLU000001  
580  
Please input PLU code.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
24 [X]  
|PLU Code| [PLU]  
|Adding Quantity|  
0 to 9999.99  
[STOCK]  
[AT/TL]  
* (Repeatable for  
the PLU of the  
next sequential  
code)  
[VOID] Subtracting|  
*
Quantity  
0 to 9999.99  
|
Repeat for other PLUs for stock change.  
ex.) To subtract 150 from 580 of a current stock quantity of a PLU 1.  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 24, depress [X].  
1 [PLU] [VOID] 150 [STOCK] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P24  
000001  
STOCK  
PLU000001  
-150  
430  
0038 14:07TM  
NOTES:  
1. When you enter 24 and depress the [X] key, a current stock quantity of each PLU will be  
displayed.  
2. The total stock quantity of a PLU after the addition or subtraction must not exceed the value  
range from 0 through 9999.99. Otherwise, the Adding or Subtracting Quantity entry will result in  
an error. Use the [ . ] key if decimal portion is contained.  
3. The PLU Code here must exist in the PLU Table file and the PLU must be set with Stock-process  
status.  
5-34  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26)  
In the PLU Table Programming operation (Submode 4), some of Scale-compulsory PLUs may be set with a  
Tare Table No. The actual tare weight is set to each Tare Table here. Also, the General Unit Weight is set  
here so that the Unit Weight may be effective to scale items entered through departments or PLUs without any  
Individual Unit Weight designation.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 26 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING TARE SCALE  
0.001b  
0.001b  
0.001b  
0.001b  
0.001b  
0.001b  
0.001b  
0.001b  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
26 [X]  
|Tare Table No.| [ST]  
|Tare Weight| [#]  
1 to 9  
*
Only to set  
the General  
Unit Weight  
0 to 999 (Unit: 1/100  
LB or gram. Example:  
enter 13 for 0.13 LB.)  
Repeat for other tables.  
* (For sequentially programming tables, the  
Table No. specification can be skipped.)  
10 [ST]  
**  
|General Unit Weight Code| [#]  
[AT/TL]  
1 to 11  
LB Unit  
1 LB  
2 LB  
Kg Unit  
1 Kg  
2 Kg  
** Only to set the  
Tare Weight  
1:  
2
3
3 LB  
3 Kg  
4
4 LB  
4 Kg  
5
5 LB  
5 Kg  
6
6 LB  
6 Kg  
7
7 LB  
7 Kg  
8
8 LB  
8 Kg  
9
9 LB  
9 Kg  
10  
11  
1/2 LB  
1/4 LB  
100 g  
Not applicable  
ex.) To set the following.  
Journal Print  
Tare Table No. 1 with Tare Weight 0.13 LB  
General Weight 2 LB (Code 2).  
P26  
#01  
#10  
TARE SCALE  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 26, depress [X].  
1 [ST] 13 [#] 10 [ST] 2 [#] [AT/TL]  
0.131b  
21b  
0042 15:26TM  
NOTE: The initial value for the General Unit Weight is set to Code 1 (1LB or 1Kg).  
5-35  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
PLU Preset-code Key/Display Key Setting (Submode 27)  
This programming is used to assign a PLU code to each PLU Preset-code key (SFKC 96), and also used to  
assign a display menu table No. to each display key (SFKC 210). You can assign a maximum of 5 different  
PLU codes or 5 different display menu table Nos. to one key of the keyboard.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 27 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING PLU KEY  
S1  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
27 [X]  
|Keyboard No.| [ST]  
|PLU Code or Display Menu Table No.|  
[KEY]  
[AT/TL]  
1: ECR Keyboard 1  
2: ECR Keyboard 2  
3: ECR Keyboard 3  
4: ECR Keyboard 4  
5: ECR Keyboard 5  
Max. 6 digits for PLU Code  
1 to 99 for Display Menu Table No.  
(Enter 0 to close a key)  
Depress  
the  
required  
key on  
the ECR  
Keyboard.  
Repeat for other Keys.  
ex.) To assign the PLU code 9 to the required key on the ECR Keyboard 2 and the display menu table No. 2  
to the required key on the ECR Keyboard 5.  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 27, depress [X].  
2 [ST] 9 [required key of SFKC 96] 5 [ST] 2 [required key of SFKC 210] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P27  
2
PLU  
PLU KEY  
Keyboard Phase No.  
Location Code (left); refer to REMARK on the next page.  
PLU Code assigned to a key (right)  
#103 000009  
5
DISPLAY  
#075 02  
0046 16:21TM  
NOTES:  
1. When an entry of PLU code or display menu table No. is skipped and a [KEY] is simply  
depressed in the above key operation, the preprogrammed PLU code or display menu table No.  
of the KEY will be displayed.  
2. If “0” is entered as PLU Code or display menu table No. in the above sequence, the KEY will be  
closed. Pressing the closed KEY in sale entry will be ignored.  
3. The five phases of the keyboard can be shifted by the [MENU] keys in actual sales transaction.  
5-36  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
REMARK: When a PLU code (display menu No.) is assigned to a PLU Preset-code Key (Display Key) on the  
ECR Keyboard in the operation on the preceding page, the Hardware Key Code which indicates the  
absolute location of the key will be printed to the left of the assigned PLU Code (display menu No.).  
The Hardware Key Codes of the ECR keyboard are shown below.  
ECR Keyboard  
1
2
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
3
93  
4
94  
5
95  
6
96  
7
97  
8
98  
9
99  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
Navigation Key  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
Navigation Key 1  
Navigation Key 2  
Navigation Key 3  
Navigation Key 4  
Navigation Key 5  
5-37  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29)  
This programming is used to set each PLU group name. Grouping of each PLU should be set in the PLU  
Table Programming (Submode 4).  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 29 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING PLU GROUP  
01 PLU GP01  
02 PLU GP02  
03 PLU GP03  
04 PLU GP04  
05 PLU GP05  
06 PLU GP06  
07 PLU GP07  
08 PLU GP08  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
29 [X]  
|PLU Group Code| [ST]  
Character Entries  
(See NOTE)  
[ST]  
[AT/TL]  
(1 to 99)  
*
Repeat for other groups  
(max. 99 groups)  
* (For sequentially programming Group Codes  
and Names, the code specification can be skipped.)  
ex.) To set “BEER” for a PLU group 2  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 29, depress [X].  
2 [ST] BEER [ST] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P29  
02  
PLU GROUP  
BEER  
0050 16:52TM  
NOTE: A maximum of 16 regular-sized characters may be set for each PLU Group name. One double-sized  
character occupies two regular-sized characters’ space. Also see the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the  
beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a PLU Group, an auto-preset data is assigned  
as the PLU Group Name (PLU GPxx; xx = PLU Group Code 01 to 99).  
5-38  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
RKP Message Programming (Submode 30)  
This programming is used to set 20 RKP messages (a maximum of 20 characters x 2 lines for each), and also  
used to designate an RKP on which each message is outputted. If your printer is the TM-300, you can select a  
color for each message.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 30 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING RKP MESSAGE  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Guest Card Reading through the MCR  
Address 1: Guest Name  
|1st Line Message Entries| [ST]  
Max. 20 characters  
Initial Setting: Blank for all characters  
30 [X]  
|Message No.| [NS]  
1 [ST]  
1 to 20  
Submode No.  
Address 1: Guest Name  
|2nd Line Message Entries| [ST]  
Max. 20 characters  
2 [ST]  
Initial Setting: Blank for all characters  
Address 1: Guest Name  
|RKP No. of the destination| [#]  
Max. 4 digits: Multiple RKPs are selectable.  
(NOTE 2 below) Initial Setting: RKP No. 1  
3 [ST]  
Address 1: Guest Name  
|Color| [#]  
0: Black (Initial Setting)  
1: Red  
4 [ST]  
Repeat for another message.  
[AT/TL]  
ex.) To set the following to the RKP message 1.  
Journal Print  
1st Line:  
2nd Line:  
Destination: 13 (RKP Nos. 1 and 3)  
20 RKP MESSAGES ARE  
PROGRAMMABLE!  
P30  
01  
RKP MESSAGE  
#01  
#02  
#03  
20 RKP MESSAGES ARE  
PROGRAMMABLE!  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 30, depress [X].  
1 [NS] 1 [ST] 20 [SPACE] RKP [SPACE]  
MESSAGES [SPACE] ARE [SPACE] [ST]  
(2 [ST]) PROGRAMMABLE! [ST] (3 [ST])  
13 [#] [AT/TL]  
13  
0051 17:01TM  
NOTES:  
1. When you fill one whole line with all blanks, it will result in a one line space.  
2. When you want to designate the RKP Nos. 1 and 3 as the destinations, enter 13, then depress  
the [#] key.  
5-39  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Display Message Programming (Submode 31)  
This programming is used to set a display message which is displayed in the 16-digit dot window provided to  
the customer display and the LCD operator display while the mode lock of the register is in “LOCK” position. A  
display message can be used for information, welcome greeting, etc.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 31 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING DISPLAY MSG  
01  
02  
03  
04  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
31 [X]  
|Message Line No.| [ST]  
(1 to 4; max. 4 lines)  
Character Entries  
(Max. 16 characters per  
line. Regular-size only.)  
[ST]  
[AT/TL]  
*
Repeat for other lines.  
* Allowed for sequential Line No. only  
ex.) To set a message “WE SERVE THE CHOICEST FOOD. PLEASE ENJOY YOUR DINNER.”  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 35, depress [X].  
1 [ST] WE [SPACE] SERVE [SPACE] THE [SPACE] CHO [ST]  
(2 [ST]) ICEST [SPACE] FOOD. [ST] (3 [ST]) PLEASE [SPACE] ENJOY [SPACE] YOU [ST]  
(4 [ST]) R [SPACE] DINNER. [ST] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P31  
DISPLAY MSG  
WE SERVE THE CHO  
ICEST FOOD.  
PLEASE ENJOY YOU  
R DINNER.  
#01  
#02  
#03  
#04  
0052 17:59TM  
NOTES:  
1. You can select either of two features; “Scrolling Display; initial setting” or “16 Characters Held  
Display”. If you select the feature “16 Characters Held Display”, refer to the section 9.2 Store  
Message Display on page 9-2 (Operator’s Guide) to display each message.  
2. When the “SCROLLING DISPLAY” feature is selected, a maximum of 64 characters can be  
entered consecutively after designating Line No. 1 at first and depressing [ST] for each line end.  
3. A character must be regular-sized only.  
4. A DISPLAY MESSAGE set here will also appear in the REG or MGR mode if so selected by a  
program option.  
5. A message display on the LCD operator display is possible when the feature “16 Characters Held  
Display” has been selected.  
5-40  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key (Submode 35)  
This programming is used to set an amount limit for the [DISC] key.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 35 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING LIMIT TABLE  
01 DISC  
0.00  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
35 [X]  
1 [ST]  
|Limit Amount| [#]  
Max. 6 digits  
[AT/TL]  
Enter 0 to reset the limt.  
ex.) To set $5.00 as a limit amount  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 35, depress [X].  
1 [ST] 500 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P35  
DISC  
LIMIT TABLE  
5.00  
0067 18:39TM  
NOTE: The limit set here cannot be released by the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key in transaction entries.  
5-41  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Set Menu Table Programming (Submode 42)  
This programming is used to set a Set Menu Table and their respective Sub Menu PLUs. If a PLU is  
programmed with a Set Menu Table No. (Address 12 of the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING), the PLU will be a  
main menu PLU of the Set Menu Table. When the main menu PLU is entered in a sale, the sub menu PLUs  
which have been programmed in the Set Menu Table will be automatically entered (Preset Set Menu), or other  
PLUs can be manually entered as sub menu items (Open Set Menu).  
Programming  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 42 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING SET MENU  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Please input table No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Repeat for another table.  
*
42 [X]  
|Set Menu Table No.| [NS]  
1 to 50 (Enter the No.  
1 [ST]  
|Sub Menu PLU Code| [PLU]  
[#]  
[AT/TL]  
programmed to the Main  
Menu PLU in Submode 4.)  
Repeat other sub menu PLUs to be contained  
in the same table. (Max. 7 PLUs)  
2 [ST]  
|Enterable Qty of Sub Menu PLUs| [#]  
0 to 30  
* (For sequentially programming tables, the Table No. specification can be skipped.)  
ex.) To set the following sub menu PLUs to a set menu table No. 1.  
Journal Print  
Sub Menu PLUs:  
30, 40, 50  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 42, depress [X].  
P42  
01  
SET MENU  
1 [NS] 1 [ST] 30 [PLU] 40 [PLU]  
50 [PLU] [#] [AT/TL]  
#01  
000030  
000040  
000050  
0072 19:40TM  
NOTES:  
1. To make a preset set menu, enter PLUs after the key sequence “1 [ST]” as shown above. If  
changing a preset set menu into an open set menu, operate the key sequence “1 [ST] 0 [#]”  
after designating the table No.  
2. To make an open set menu, depress the [#] key immediately after the key sequence “1 [ST]”.  
The setting of the enterable quantity of sub menu PLUs is applied only to an open set menu. If its  
quantity is programmed, the set menu entry will be automatically finalized when the quantity of  
sub menu PLUs reaches the programmed quantity.  
5-42  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Deletion  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
42 [X]  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
[ITEM CORR]  
|Set Menu Table No.| [NS]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable for other tables to be deleted.  
Journal Print  
P42  
02  
SET MENU  
----------------------------------------  
0074 19:53TM  
Combo Sale Table Programming (Submode 43)  
This programming is used to set a combo sales table.  
Programming  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 43 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING COMBO  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Please input COMBO code.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
5-43  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
As for details of each address,  
refer to the following page.  
As for details of each address,  
refer to the following pages.  
Address 1: Combo Table Name  
Character Entries [ST]  
Max. 16 characters  
43 [X]  
|Combo Table No.| [NS]  
1 [ST]  
1 to 99  
Address 2: Grouping Item 1  
|Grouping Item| [#]  
|Grouping Item Code| [#]  
|Grouping Item| [#]  
2 [ST]  
Submode No.  
Address 3: Grouping Item Code 1  
3 [ST]  
Address 4: Grouping Item 2  
4 [ST]  
Address 5: Grouping Item Code 2  
|Grouping Item Code| [#]  
|Grouping Item| [#]  
5 [ST]  
Address 6: Grouping Item 3  
6 [ST]  
Address 7: Grouping Item Code 3  
|Grouping Item Code| [#]  
|Grouping Item| [#]  
7 [ST]  
Address 8: Grouping Item 4  
8 [ST]  
Address 9: Grouping Item Code 4  
|Grouping Item Code| [#]  
|Grouping Item| [#]  
9 [ST]  
Address 10: Grouping Item 5  
10 [ST]  
Address 11: Grouping Item Code 5  
|Grouping Item Code| [#]  
|Grouping Item| [#]  
11 [ST]  
Address 12: Grouping Item 6  
12 [ST]  
Address 13: Grouping Item Code 6  
|Grouping Item Code| [#]  
|Priority Code| [#]  
13 [ST]  
Address 14: Priority  
14 [ST]  
Address 15: Day-of-Week Designation  
|Day-of-Week Code| [#]  
|Hour/Minute| [#]  
15 [ST]  
Address 16: Start Time  
16 [ST]  
Address 17: End Time  
|Hour/Minute| [#]  
17 [ST]  
Address 18: Process Status  
|Process Status Code| [#]  
|Process Value| [#]  
18 [ST]  
Address 19: Process Value  
19 [ST]  
Address 20: Grouping Item Designation  
|Grouping Item Designation Code| [#]  
20 [ST]  
Repeat for another combo table.  
[AT/TL]  
5-44  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Combo Sale Table Programming Contents  
Description of Programming Contents  
Address No.  
2,4,6,8,10,12 Grouping Item  
Enter 1 for a department item, 2 for a PLU item. Entry of “0” will be ignored.  
NOTE: Do not set a department together with a PLU which is linked to the department in the  
same combo sale table.  
3,5,7,9,11,13 Grouping Item Code  
Enter 1 to 99 for a department item, a max. 6-digit code for a PLU item.  
Priority Code  
14  
Enter 1 to 99. (Smaller code has a priority; 1 is the first priority.)  
Entry of “0” will be ignored.  
15  
Day-of-Week Designation  
Enter a max. 7-digit value combining the following code.  
1: Sunday  
5: Thursday  
6: Friday  
7: Saturday  
0: No designation  
2: Monday  
3: Tuesday  
4: Wednesday  
ex.) When you designate Monday and Thursday, enter 25.  
Start/End Time  
Enter “Hour” (0 to 23), then “Minute” (00 to 59).  
Process Status  
16,17  
18  
Enter a 1-digit code from the following codes.  
1: Designated Grouping Item Free of Charge  
2: %- on Whole Grouping  
3: Dollar Discount on Whole Grouping  
4: %- on Designated Grouping Item  
5: Dollar Discount on Designated Grouping Item  
0: Fixed Price  
19  
20  
Process Value  
Effective value depends on the process status as follows.  
Process Status 0:  
Process Status 2 or 4:  
Process Status 3 or 5:  
Fixed Price 0 to 999999  
% Rate 0 to 99.999  
Dollar Discount 0 to 999999  
Grouping Designation  
Enter a 1-digit value from 1 to 6.  
NOTE: This address is effective when you have selected 1, 4 or 5 in the process status  
selection.  
ex.) To set the following to a combo table 1.  
Combo Table 1: Address 1 (Combo Name):  
COMBO A  
Address 2 (Grouping Item 1):  
Address 3 (Grouping Item 1 Code):  
Address 4 (Grouping Item 2):  
Address 5 (Grouping Item 2 Code):  
Address 6 (Grouping Item 3):  
Address 7 (Grouping Item 3 Code):  
Address 14 (Priority):  
2 (PLU)  
100  
2 (PLU)  
200  
2 (PLU)  
300  
10  
Address 15 (Day-of-Week Designation):  
Address 16 (Start Time):  
1 (Sunday)  
1030 (10:30)  
Address 17 (End Time):  
1400 (14:00)  
Address 18 (Process Status):  
1 (Designated Grouping Item Free of  
1 Charge)  
Address 20 (Grouping Item Designation):  
2 (Grouping Item 2)  
5-45  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 43, depress [X].  
1 [NS] 1 [ST] COMBO A [ST] (2 [ST]) 2 [#] (3 [ST]) 100 [#] (4 [ST]) 2 [#] (5 [ST]) 200 [#]  
(6 [ST]) 2 [#] (7 [ST]) 300 [#] 14 [ST] 10 [#] (15 [ST]) 1 [#] (16 [ST]) 1030 [#] (17 [ST]) 1400 [#]  
(18 [ST]) 1 [#] 20 [ST] 2 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P43  
01  
COMBO  
#01  
COMBO A  
#02  
#03  
#04  
#05  
#06  
#07  
#14  
#15  
#16  
#17  
#18  
#20  
2
000100  
2
000200  
2
000300  
10  
1
10:30TM  
14:00TM  
1
2
0078 22:37TM  
Deletion  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
43 [X]  
After Combo Sale Reset  
Mode Lock: SET  
[ITEM CORR]  
|Combo Table No.| [NS]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable for other tables to be deleted.  
Journal Print  
P43  
01  
COMBO  
----------------------------------------  
0079 22:50TM  
5-46  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Guest Check Commercial Message Programming (Submode 45)  
This programming is used to set a commercial message printed on a guest check.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 45 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING INVO CM MSG  
1
2
3
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Repeat for another line.  
45 [X]  
|Line No.| [ST]  
1 to 3  
(For sequentially programming  
lines, the line number  
specification can be skipped.)  
Character Entries  
[ST]  
[AT/TL]  
max. 40 characters/line  
ex.) To set a commercial message “SPECIAL LUNCH MENU FROM 11:00 TO 13:00” on the line No. 1.  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 45, depress [X].  
1 [ST] SPECIAL LUNCH [SPACE] MENU [SPACE] FROM [SPACE] 11:00 [SPACE] TO [SPACE]  
13:00 [ST] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P45  
#01  
INVO CM MSG  
SPECIAL LUNCH MENU FROM 11:00 TO 13:00  
0080 23:06TM  
NOTES:  
1. For each line, a maximum of 40 regular-sized characters or 20 double-sized characters may be  
entered. A combination of both types is also available.  
2. If programming blanks for all three lines, no extra lines will be fed. If any one of the three lines is  
programmed, the two other lines will result in two lines space.  
5-47  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Day Part Setting (Submode 46)  
A maximum of 6 day parts can be set. You can obtain major group sales data by each day part.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
After Day Part Reset  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 46 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING DAY PART  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
Please input data.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
46 [X]  
|Hour| |Minute| [#]  
[AT/TL]  
Enter the time that ends  
each day part, in the 24-  
hour system.  
Repeat until all the day parts are entered. (max. 6 day parts)  
ex.) To set the following day part table.  
Day Part 1: Up to 10:00*  
Day Part 2: 10:01 to 14:00  
Day Part 3: 14:01 to 18:00  
Day Part 4: 18:01 to 22:00  
*
(The first day part is automatically continued from 22:01 of the preceding day.)  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 46, depress [X].  
1000 [#] 1400 [#] 1800 [#] 2200 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P46  
DAY PART  
10:00TM  
14:00TM  
18:00TM  
22:00TM  
0083 10:40TM  
NOTES:  
1. A maximum of 6 day parts can be set.  
2. To change the table of day parts once set, partially or entirely, do the entire setting operation over  
again.  
2. To reset the day parts table once set, operate:  
Mode Lock: SET  
46 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL]  
Then no day part sales data will be outputted on the reports.  
3. Do not set a day part across 24:00, such as “from 23:00 to 1:00”. If set, no data will be processed  
into that day part.  
5-48  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Employee Table Setting (Submode 50)  
This programming is used to assign a cashier code and a job code to each employee.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
After Employee Clock-in/Clock-out  
Daily and GT Reset  
When you enter 50 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
Mode Lock: SET  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING EMPLOYEE  
Please input Employee code.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Guest Card Reading through the MCR  
Address 1: Employee Name  
Character Entries [ST]  
Max. 12 characters  
50 [X]  
|Employee Code| [NS]  
1 [ST]  
1 to 9999  
Submode No.  
*
Address 2: Cashier Code  
|Cashier Code| [#]  
2 [ST]  
0 to 99  
Address 3: Job Code  
|Job Code| [#]  
Max. 20 digits  
3 [ST]  
Repeat for another employee.  
* Repeatable from here if an employee code is sequential.  
[AT/TL]  
Employee Table Programming Contents  
Description of Programming Contents  
Address No.  
2
Cashier Code  
Enter a manager-assign code (1 to 99). A cashier for which 0 has been entered for a  
cashier code cannot sign ON on the register.  
NOTE: Do not set the same cashier code for multiple employees.  
3
Job Code  
Enter a max. 20-digit value combining the job codes 1 to 10. (When you enter a 1-digit  
numeric 1 to 9, add 0 before the numeric.) As a result, a maximum of 10 job codes can be  
assigned to each employee.  
NOTE: Each job definition should be programmed in the Job Code/ Working Hours Setting  
(Submode 51).  
NOTE: A maximum of 200 employees can be managed.  
ex.) To set the following to an employee No. 1.  
Employee No. 1:  
Address 1 (Name):  
JONES  
Address 2 (Cashier Code):  
Address 3 (Job Code):  
1
010203 (Job Code 1,2,3)  
5-49  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 50, depress [X].  
1 [NS] 1 [ST] JONES [ST] (2 [ST]) 1 [#] (3 [ST]) 010203 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P50  
EMPLOYEE  
0001  
#01  
#02  
#03  
00005  
JONES  
01  
010203  
0086 13:04TM  
Deletion  
CONDITION  
After Employee Clock-in/Clock-out  
Daily and GT Reset  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
50 [X]  
[ITEM CORR]  
|Employee Code| [NS]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable for another employee to be deleted.  
Journal Print  
P50  
0002  
EMPLOYEE  
----------------------------------------  
00004  
0091 15:53TM  
Job Code/Working Hours Setting (Submode 51)  
This programming is used to define each job and also set regular working hours for each job.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
After Employee Clock-in/Clock-out  
Daily and GT Reset  
When you enter 51 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
Mode Lock: SET  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING JOB CODE  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
5-50  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Guest Card Reading through the MCR  
Address 1: Job Name  
Character Entries [ST]  
Max. 12 characters  
51 [X]  
|Job Code| [NS]  
1 to 10  
1 [ST]  
Address 2: Job Status  
Submode No.  
|Job Status| [#]  
2 [ST]  
0 to 3  
Address 1: Daily Regular Working  
Hour  
|Daily Regular Working Hour for each Job| [#]  
11 [NS]  
1 [ST]  
1 to 24  
Address 2: Weekly Regular  
Working Hour  
|Weekly Regular Working Hour for each Job| [#]  
2 [ST]  
1 to 99  
Address 3: Time Unit  
|Time Unit for each Job| [#]  
3 [ST]  
0 to 4  
Repeat for another job.  
[AT/TL]  
Job Code Programming Contents  
Address No.  
2
Description of Programming Contents  
Job Status  
Select one status from the following.  
0: Normal  
1: Chief Cashier  
2: Server  
3: ECR Operation Prohibited  
Working Hour Programming Contents  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
1
2
3
8 hours is initially set as a regular working hours for each job.  
40 hours is initially set as a weekly working hours for each job.  
Select one unit from the following.  
0: None  
1: 5 minutes unit  
2: 15 minutes unit  
3: 30 minutes unit  
4: 60 minutes unit  
ex.) To set the following.  
Job Code 1: Job Code Address  
Address 1 (Job Name):  
CASHIER  
Address 2 (Job Status): 0 (Normal)  
Working Hour Address  
Address 1 (Daily Regular Working Hour):  
7 (7 Hours)  
Address 2 (Weekly Regular Working Hour): 35 (35 Hours)  
Address 3 (Time Unit): 0 (None)  
5-51  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Job Code 2: Job Code Address  
Address 1 (Job Name):  
COOK  
Address 2 (Job Status): 3 (ECR Operation Prohibited)  
Working Hour Address  
Address 1 (Daily Regular Working Hour):  
Address 2 (Weekly Regular Working Hour): 45 (45 Hours)  
Address 3 (Time Unit): 0 (None)  
9 (9 Hours)  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 51, depress [X].  
1 [NS] 1 [ST] CASHIER [ST] (2 [ST]) 0 [#] 11 [NS] 1 [ST] 7 [#] (2 [ST]) 35 [#] (3 [ST]) 0 [#]  
2 [NS] 1 [ST] COOK [ST] (2 [ST]) 3 [#] 11 [NS] 1 [ST] 9 [#] (2 [ST]) 45 [#] (3 [ST]) 0 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P51  
01  
JOB CODE  
#01  
#02  
CASHIER  
0
11  
#01  
#02  
#03  
7
35  
0
02  
11  
#01  
#02  
COOK  
3
#01  
#02  
#03  
9
45  
0
0089 15:43TM  
Tender Up Table Setting (Submode 52)  
This programming is used to set an amount table for the[TENDER UP] key. On how to use the [TENDER UP] key,  
refer to section 9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of A Sale) on page 9-20 (Operator’s Guide).  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 52 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING TENDER UP  
01  
0.00  
Please input data.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
52 [X]  
|Tender Up Amount| [#]  
[AT/TL]  
Max. 8 digits  
Repeatable for 10 amounts. (NOTE 1 on the next page)  
5-52  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
ex.) To set the following tender up table.  
$50.00, $100.00, $150.00, $200.00  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 52, depress [X].  
5000 [#] 10000 [#] 15000 [#] 20000 [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P52  
TENDER UP  
50.00  
100.00  
150.00  
200.00  
0100 16:48TM  
NOTES:  
1. A tender up amount should be set from a smaller to a larger.  
2. If a tender up table has been programmed as follows, $50.00, $100.00, $150.00, an error will  
occur when you depress the [TENDER UP] key for a sales total of more than $150.  
3. To reset the tender up table once set, operate as follows.  
52 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL]  
Display Menu Table Setting (Submode 53)  
This programming is used to set a display menu table corresponding to each [DISPLAY] key.  
Programming  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 53 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING MENU TABLE  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Please input table No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
A maximum of 20 PLU items can be  
entered in one display menu table.  
Address 1: Guest Name  
|PLU Code| [PLU]  
Max. 6 digits  
53 [X]  
|Display Menu No.| [NS]  
1 [ST]  
[#]  
1 to 99  
Address 2: Charge Posting Limit  
Amount for each Guest  
Submode No.  
|Select Status| [#]  
0: Select Allowed  
2 [ST]  
1: Select Prohibited  
(NOTE on the next page)  
Repeat for another display menu table.  
[AT/TL]  
5-53  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
ex.) To set the following PLU items in a display menu table No. 1.  
PLU Codes 100, 105, 110, 115  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 53, depress [X].  
1 [NS] 1 [ST] 100 [PLU] 105 [PLU] 110 [PLU] 115 [PLU] [#] [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P53  
01  
MENU TABLE  
#01  
000100  
000105  
000110  
000115  
0102 17:26TM  
NOTE: Depressing the [SELECT] key in a sales transaction causes an error if the corresponding display menu  
table has the “Select Prohibited” status.  
Deletion  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
53 [X]  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
[ITEM CORR]  
|Display Menu No.| [NS]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable for another display menu table to be deleted.  
Journal Print  
P53  
05  
MENU TABLE  
----------------------------------------  
0103 17:28TM  
5-54  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing (Submode 60)  
This programming is used to set or change each PLU price.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 60 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING PRICE  
S1  
Please input PLU code.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Repeatable for other PLUs  
60 [X]  
|PLU Code| [PLU]  
Max. 6 digits  
[PLU Preset-code Key]  
[MENU 1 to 5]  
|Price Level| [ST]  
|New Preset Price| [#]  
[AT/TL]  
1 to 5  
Max. 6 digits  
Repeatable for a price change of another price level. When you  
change the price of each price level in numerical order, the price level  
designation can be skipped.  
When a [MENU] key is depressed, a Keyboard No. will be displayed on the LCD operator display.  
After a [MENU] key is depressed, a Keyboard No. will be held until another [MENU] key is depressed.  
When the programming is completed by the [AT/TL] key depression, the Keyboard No. 1 will be  
automatically regained.  
To change a preset-price PLU into an open-price PLU, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and simply depress the  
[#] key. Presetting a zero-price is also possible.  
ex.) To change a price of the PLU Code 21 as follows.  
Journal Print  
$5.00 (Price Level 1)  
$2.80 (Price Level 3)  
P60  
000021  
PRICE  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 60, depress [X].  
21 [PLU] 1 [ST] 500 [#] 3 [ST] 280 [#] [AT/TL]  
PLU000021  
#01  
#03  
5.00@  
2.80@  
0111 18:35TM  
5-55  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Printer Table Setting (Submode 71)  
This programming is used to set a printer table. You can set two printer tables.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you enter 71 and depress the [X] key,  
the screen shown below will appear.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING PRINTER  
01 OUTPUT SIDE1  
02 SIDE1 STATUS  
03 OUTPUT SIDE2  
04 SIDE2 STATUS  
05 CONNECT PRT  
06 BAUD RATE  
Please input item No.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Address 1: Destination of Output (Printer Table 1)  
71 [X]  
1 [NS]  
|Destination of Output| [ST]  
|Terminal ID/Port No.| [#]  
*
When the multiple destinations are designated  
Address 2: Connection Status (Printer Table 1)  
2 [NS]  
|Destination of Output| [ST]  
|Connection Status| [#]  
*
When the multiple destinations are designated  
Address 3: Destination of Output (Printer Table 2)  
3 [NS]  
|Destination of Output| [ST]  
|Terminal ID/Port No.| [#]  
*
When the multiple destinations are designated  
Address 4: Connection Status (Printer Table 2)  
4 [NS]  
|Destination of Output| [ST]  
|Connection Status| [#]  
*
When the multiple destinations are designated  
Address 5: Printer Model  
5 [NS]  
|Port No.| [ST]  
|Printer| [#]  
*
When the multiple ports are designated  
Address 6: Transmission Speed  
6 [NS]  
|Port No.| [ST]  
|Transmission Speed| [#]  
[AT/TL]  
*
When the multiple ports are designated  
* Repeatable from here if each code is sequential.  
5-56  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Printer Table Setting Contents  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
1, 3  
Destination of Output  
Destination of data output is as follows.  
1: Receipt  
2: RKP 1  
3: RKP 2  
4: RKP 3  
5: RKP 4  
6: Journal  
Terminal ID/Port No.  
Enter a 2-digit terminal ID No. and a 1-digit port No.  
NOTE: If your system is the standalone system, enter only a 1-digit port No.  
2, 4  
Destination of Output  
Destination of data output is as follows.  
1: Receipt  
2: RKP 1  
3: RKP 2  
4: RKP 3  
5: RKP 4  
6: Journal  
Connection Status  
Connection status is as follows.  
0: OFF (Disconnection)  
1: ON (Connection)  
NOTE: When a terminal ID/port No. is entered, a connection status will be automatically set  
to “ON” (Connection).  
5
Port No.  
Port No. is as follows.  
1: Port 1  
2: Port 2  
3: Port 3 (Hardware Option)  
Printer  
A printer connectable is as follows.  
1: TM-300 (Receipt, RKP 1 to 4, Journal)  
2: TM-T88 (Receipt, RKP 1 to 4)  
3: BRST-10 (Receipt)  
0: None  
6
Port No.  
Port No. is as follows.  
1: Port 1  
2: Port 2  
3: Port 3 (Hardware Option)  
Transmission Speed  
0: 19200 bps  
1: 9600 bps  
ex.) To set the following to a printer table 1.  
Printer Table 1  
Address 1 (Destination of Output):  
1 (Receipt)/1 (Port 1)  
2 (RKP 1)/2 (Port 2)  
6 (Journal)/2 (Port 2)  
Address 2 (Connection Status):  
Address 5 (Printer):  
1: ON for all the destinations  
1 (Port 1) for 3 (BRST-10)  
2 (Port 2) for 1 (TM-300)  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 71, depress [X].  
1 [NS] 1 [ST] 1 [#] (2 [ST]) 2 [#] 6 [ST] 2 [#] 2 [NS] 1 [ST] 1 [#] (2 [ST]) 1 [#] 6 [ST] 1 [#] 5 [NS]  
1 [ST] 3 [#] (2 [ST]) 1 [#] [AT/TL]  
5-57  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Journal Print  
P71  
1
PRINTER  
#01  
#02  
#06  
1 1  
1 2  
1 2  
2
5
#01  
#02  
#06  
1
1
1
#01  
#02  
3
1
0131 10:20TM  
NOTE: A connection status of each RKP can also be changed by an operation in the MGR mode. For details,  
refer to the section 2.5 RKP Table Change on page 2-3 of the manager’s guide.  
%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting  
A preset rate may be set on each of the [%+] and [%-] keys, one independent rate for each key. Once a rate  
is preset, the % key will simply be depressed without a prior rate entry to activate the preset rate. If a rate is  
entered prior to the depression of the key, the entered rate (manual rate) will be activated instead.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you complete the following  
programming, the screen shown below will  
appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go  
back to the program menu screen.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING MISC  
01 %1RATE  
02 %2RATE  
03 %3RATE  
04 %4RATE  
05 %5RATE  
06 %6RATE  
07 %7RATE  
08 %8RATE  
0%  
0%  
0%  
0%  
0%  
0%  
0%  
0%  
Please input data.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
|Preset Rate| [%+] (For Percent Charge Preset Rate)  
(0.001 to 99.999 (%);  
use the [ . ] key if a decimal portion is contained.)  
|Preset Rate| [%-] (For Percent Discount Preset Rate)  
|Preset Rate| [%3] to [%8] (For Percent Discount Preset Rates for Additional %- Keys)  
5-58  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
ex.) To set 10% on [%+] Key:  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 10, depress [%+].  
To reset the rate once set:  
Enter 0, depress the required % key.  
(Then the % key will always require a manual rate entry in sale entries.)  
Journal Print  
P00  
%+  
%1RATE  
0139 10:49TM  
10%  
Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2)  
If any of [ST1/TL] (or [SI/TL]) and [SI2/TL] keys are installed on the keyboard, a preset rate may be  
programmed on each key.  
As for the functions and applications of the Selective Itemizers, refer to the description on the next page.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you complete the following  
programming, the screen shown below will  
appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go  
back to the program menu screen.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING MISC  
09 SI1%RATE  
↑↓  
0%  
0%  
10 SI2%RATE  
11 CUR RATE1  
12 CUR RATE2  
13 CUR RATE3  
14 CUR RATE4  
15 CUR RATE5  
16 REG NO.  
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
#0  
Please input data.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
|Preset Rate of SI 1|  
[SI1/TL] (or [SI/TL])  
(0.001 to 99.999 (%);  
use the [ . ] key if a decimal portion is contained.)  
|Preset Rate of SI 2|  
[SI2/TL]  
ex.) To set 7% as SI 1 preset % rate:  
Mode Lock: SET  
7 [ST1/TL]  
5-59  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Journal Print  
P00  
SI1 TL  
SI1%RATE  
7%  
0140 11:04TM  
NOTES:  
1. Whether the calculated amount by the preset SI % rate affects (i.e. add to or subtract from) the  
sale total is determined by a program option.  
2. To reset the rate once set, enter 0 as the rate. (Then the rate is regarded as 100% if the option  
“Non-affect” is selected. With the option “SI Affects Sale Total”, some rate other than “0” should  
be programmed.)  
Selective Itemizer Functions and Applications  
The “Selective Itemizer” is a temporary total memory for each sale and is activated separately from the Main  
Itemizer (i.e. sale total memory). If certain PLU items are programmed with the SI (selective itemizer) “net” status,  
the Selective Itemizer will function to add up amounts of the SI-net status items in registering the items, while the  
Main Itemizer will function to add up all the items in the sale. Thus, near the sale finalization, the operator may  
read the SI content by depressing the [SI/TL] key.  
A preset % rate may be programmed for each of SI1 and SI2 (on the preceding page), and whether the  
calculated amount will add to, subtract from, or non-affect the sale total is a program option. Whether the amount  
resulted by depressing the [SI/TL] key will print or non-print is another program option.  
The applications of this function may vary from store to store. Some stores may use it for counting the service  
stamps to be issued to the customers according to the sale amount of service-stampable items. In this case, the  
option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total” should be selected, and a preset % rate, 1% for example, may be set to  
issue one service stamp for every $1.00. Thus the number of stamps to be issued to the customer is displayed  
(and printed if so programmed) as a result of calculation with the preset % rate, but the resulted value (the  
number of stamps in this case) will not affect the sale total.  
Example 1) With option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total”:  
Key Operation in REG Mode  
Receipt/Journal Print  
1 [PLU] (SI-net)  
2 [PLU] (non-SI)  
3 [PLU] (SI-net)  
[SI/TL] (1% is preset)  
[AT/TL]  
1
1
1
PLU000001  
PLU000002  
PLU000003  
1.00TS  
1.50T  
2.00TS  
0.03  
S: SI-net Status  
SI1 TL  
SUBTL  
Number of stamps to  
be issued.  
4.50  
PLU 1 and PLU 3 are programmed with SI-net-status. On depressing [SI/TL], “0.03” (which is 1% of total  
amount of PLU 1 “1.00” + PLU 3 “2.00”) is displayed and printed, and 3 stamps are to be issued to the  
customer in this case. The sale total “4.50,” is not affected by the SI calculation.  
Other stores may use it for calculating the discount amount for certain sales items during a special discount sales  
period by presetting the discount % rate on the SI and programming SI-net status to certain PLUs which are  
subject to the special discount.  
5-60  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
Example 2) With option “SI Special Discount”:  
Key Operation in REG Mode  
Receipt/Journal Print  
1 [PLU] (SI-net)  
2 [PLU] (non-SI)  
3 [PLU] (SI-net)  
[SI/TL] (10% is preset)  
[AT/TL]  
1
1
1
PLU000001  
PLU000002  
PLU000003  
1.00TS  
1.50T  
2.00TS  
-0.30  
4.20  
Discount Amount  
resulted by SI %  
SI1 TL  
SUBTL  
On depressing [SI/TL], “-0.30” (which is 10% discount from the total amount of PLU 1 + PLU 3 items) is  
displayed and printed, and that amount is subtracted from the sale total. (4.50 - 0.30 = 4.20)  
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting  
In this program, the exchange rate of each foreign currencies (corresponding to the [CUR 1] to [CUR 5] keys)  
will be set. By setting an exchange rate on each Foreign Currency Key, reading the sale total and tendering in  
the foreign currency value will be possible for sale finalization.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you complete the following  
programming, the screen shown below will  
appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go  
back to the program menu screen.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING MISC  
09 SI1%RATE  
↑↓  
0%  
0%  
10 SI2%RATE  
11 CUR RATE1  
12 CUR RATE2  
13 CUR RATE3  
14 CUR RATE4  
15 CUR RATE5  
16 REG NO.  
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
#0  
Please input data.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
|Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 1|  
0.000001 to 9999.999999  
[CUR 1]  
(Use the [ . ] key if decimal portion is contained in the rate.)  
|Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 5|  
[CUR 5]  
As for how to calculate the Exchange Rate, see the description below.  
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Calculation  
1. The rate must be calculated in the subsidiary currency unit values for both the domestic and the foreign  
currencies. (In case of calculating the rate from the domestic to a foreign currency with the same zero-  
suppress form, such as from American $ to French Franc, it will be no problem even if it is calculated in the  
main currency of $ and Franc. However, in case of exchanging from a domestic currency such as $ or Franc  
to Japanese yen or Italian Lira, or vice versa, this rule must be obeyed; otherwise a wrong rate will result.)  
2. Calculation of foreign currency exchange rate is formulated as follows.  
1 Foreign Currency = Domestic Currency/Rate  
ex.) To obtain an exchange rate converted from the domestic currency of the Japanese ¥ into the foreign  
currency American $.  
When $1.00 is equal to ¥140, 1 cent = ¥140/100 cent, results in ¥1.4.  
5-61  
EO1-11138  
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
5.4 How to Access a Program Item  
ex.) To set the rate on the preceding page for the [CUR 1] key.  
Mode Lock: SET  
1 [ . ] 4 [CUR 1]  
Journal Print  
P00  
CUR1  
CUR RATE1  
0160 11:35TM  
1.4  
*
Enter 0 to reset an exchange rate once set. You cannot use a foreign currency key of which the rate is 0.  
Store/Register No. Setting  
A maximum of 6 digits may be set as ID No. for the store and/or register. And once set, it will be printed on  
every receipt and every transaction on journal.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
When you complete the following  
programming, the screen shown below will  
appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go  
back to the program menu screen.  
SET  
02-06-1999 12:34  
*
*
PROGRAMMING MISC  
09 SI1%RATE  
↑↓  
0%  
0%  
10 SI2%RATE  
11 CUR RATE1  
12 CUR RATE2  
13 CUR RATE3  
14 CUR RATE4  
15 CUR RATE5  
16 REG NO.  
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
#0  
Please input data.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
|Store/Register No.|  
[#]  
Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999  
ex.) To set the following:  
Journal Print  
Register No. of this terminal: 3001  
OPERATION: Mode Lock: SET  
3001 [#]  
P00  
REG No.  
0161 11:42TM  
#3001  
NOTE: The preceding zeros, if entered, will not be printed. For example, if “001234” is entered in the above  
operation, “#1234” will always be printed as the Register No.  
5-62  
EO1-11138  
6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA  
6.1 How to verify a Programmed Data through the Operator Display  
6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA  
You can verify each data programmed in the preceding chapter. Two mode lock positions are available to verify  
the data; SET and X. Also two ways are available to access a programmed data you want to verify; through the  
operator display and through the keyboard.  
6.1  
How to verify a Programmed Data through the Operator Display  
When you turn the mode selector key to the SET or X position, the initial screen shown below will appear.  
SET Mode  
X Mode  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
*
*
1 PROGRAMMING  
2 PROGRAM READ  
3 PROGRAM DLL  
1
2
X
GTX  
3 PROGRAM READ  
4 E-JOURNAL  
5 OTHERS  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
TOTAL  
Enter  
0.00  
TOTAL  
COMB3  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
COMB1  
COMB2  
EJ  
A way to access an item you want to verify is the same as that described in the section 4.1.1 How to Access a  
Report Item through the Operator Display (on page 4-1 in the manager’s guide) or 5.4.1 How to Access a  
Program Item through the Operator Display (on page 5-5 in the manager’s guide).  
However, when you select “104 PLU”, the register will ask you which to choose “NORMAL” or “SIMPLE” as  
follows.  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 12:34  
PROGRAM READ PLU  
1 NORMAL  
*
*
2 SIMPLE  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Normal Verification.............. You can verify all the programmed data of a PLU table.  
Simple Verification .............. You can verify the following data of a PLU table.  
(PLU code, PLU name, tax status, link department, 1st preset price)  
NOTES:  
1. You can verify the following data in the address “100 MISC”.  
(Preset rates for the [%], [SI/TL], [CUR] keys, tax table)  
2. Addresses to verify time, date, PLU stock are not provided.  
6-1  
EO1-11138  
6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA  
6.2 How to verify a Programmed Data through the Keyboard  
6.2  
How to verify a Programmed Data through the Keyboard  
You can directly access an item you want to verify through a key operation on the keyboard while the mode lock  
position is in “SET” or “X”.  
To read out the data of programming operations with a Submode No., first enter “1,” then each Submode No.,  
and finally depress the [AT/TL] key.  
For example, to read the programmed data entered in Submode 1 (Store Name/Message, Commercial  
Message, Footer Logo Message Programming), operate:  
1 0 1  
[AT/TL]  
Submode No. (In case of a 1-digit number, add a “0” on top to be a 2-digit number.)  
Always attach “1” to the Program Submode No. for reading data.  
NOTE: Key operations to verify time, date, PLU stock are not provided.  
To verify the data of the address “100 MISC”:  
1 0 0  
[AT/TL]  
To designate a zone for the PLU table verification:  
1 0 4  
[ST]  
Zone-start [X] Zone-end  
PLU Code PLU Code |  
[PLU]  
To verify a PLU table data by “Simple” format:  
1 0 4 [PLU]  
NOTE: To verify the PLU preset-code keys programmed on ECR Keyboard phase Nos. 2 to 5:  
127 [ST] 2 to 5 [AT/TL]  
6-2  
EO1-11109  
MA-1650-3 SERIES  
3. M/S LEVEL  
OPERATOR’S GUIDE  
Table of Contents  
EO1-11138  
FS-2600-1 SERIES  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Page  
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ............................................................................1-1  
2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE .............2-1  
EO1-11138  
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
Making the most of the functions of the previously described FS-2600 standalone, the FS-2600 can be developed  
into a master-satellite system.  
By connecting a PC, the system can also be expanded to a transaction data capture system.  
Operational functions on each terminal ECR basically stay the same as on a standalone ECR, except those  
deleted, changed, or added for this M/S system use which are described later.  
PC  
RS-232C  
Master  
Terminal  
Backup Master  
Terminal  
*Printer  
Receipt Printer  
Journal Printer  
RKP (Remote Kitchen Printer)  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
RS-485  
Satellite  
Terminal  
Satellite  
Terminal  
Satellite  
Terminal  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
Printer  
Max. 6 terminals  
Max. 16 terminals  
A system has the following features.  
RKP Connection  
A system has none of the features shown left.  
Master Terminal: 1 unit  
Floating Cashier  
Order Entry controlled by Order Table No.  
Backup Master Terminal: 1 unit  
Satellite Terminals: 14 units  
Master Terminal: 1 unit  
Backup Master Terminal: 1 unit  
Satellite Terminals: 4 units  
or  
Master Terminal: 1 unit  
Satellite Terminals: 5 units  
1-1  
EO1-11138  
2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE  
2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE  
2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING  
PROCEDURE  
The following is the key that can be installed on the Master Terminal and Back up Master of an in-line system, in  
addition to the standalone specifications, and the registering procedure using the key.  
RTR (Register-to-Register) DECLARATION Key ([RTR])  
RTR  
By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal, various in-line jobs  
(DLLs, Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings, etc.) can be performed.  
PROCEDURE ON A MASTER TERMINAL FOR RTR DECLARATION  
Mode Lock: SET, X, Z or MGR/Anytime outside a sale  
Depress [RTR].  
NOTES:  
1. While a PC job is under way ( a command of ULL, DLL, or Read/Reset from the PC), the RTR  
Declaration is not possible. Similarly, while the RTR Declaration is on, no PC jobs are possible.  
2. While the RTR Declaration is on, no transaction entries in the REG, MGR or - mode are  
possible.  
3. While the RTR Declaration is on, no Backup Data Check is performed.  
4. While the RTR Declaration is on, the following jobs are operable.  
Programming Operations  
DLL Operations (DLL to Satellite Terminals)  
Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings  
Manual Copying of Backup Data  
5. The [RTR] key can be programmed to require Manager Intervention.  
6. If the option “Auto Data Copying feature” is selected for Copying of Backup Data, the RTR  
Declaration is not possible while a backup data update process is under way.  
7. If the option “Compulsion of Data Sending to PC” is selected, the RTR Declaration is not possible  
until the reset data (the consolidation data) transmission to the PC is completed.  
By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal while the RTR Declaration is on, the RTR Declaration  
ON status is canceled.  
When the [RTR] key is depressed to declare “RTR ON”, the following indicator will appear on the LCD  
operator display.  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
RTR S1  
RTR Declaration  
Indicator  
Please input cashier code  
TOTAL  
0.00  
DISP5  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP3  
DISP4  
2-1  
EO1-11138  
3. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE  
2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE  
PROCEDURE ON A MASTER TERMINAL FOR RTR DECLARATION CANCEL  
Mode Lock: SET, X, Z or MGR/RTR Declaration is ON  
Depress [RTR].  
NOTE: If the RTR declaration cancel is performed while a backup error flag is ON, a copy process of a backup  
data will be automatically performed regardless of a program option. (Automatic Copy or Manual Copy  
for Backup Data).  
2-2  
4. M/S LEVEL  
MANAGER’S GUIDE  
Table of Contents  
EO1-11138  
FS-2600-1 SERIES  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Page  
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE....................................................1-1  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
Terminal Open Check ......................................................................................................1-1  
Terminal Designation .......................................................................................................1-2  
Terminal Condition Check ...............................................................................................1-3  
Printer Condition Check ...................................................................................................1-4  
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS ........................................................................2-1  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
Terminal Reports .............................................................................................................2-1  
In-line Reports .................................................................................................................2-1  
Operations after In-line report Taking ..............................................................................2-8  
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS .....................................................................3-1  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level ....................................3-1  
Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals ....................................................3-2  
Verification of Programmed Data Related to In-line Specifications .................................3-5  
4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS .....................................................4-1  
4.1  
4.2  
DLL Job List .....................................................................................................................4-1  
Print Format of DLL Operations .......................................................................................4-2  
5. PLU MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................5-1  
5.1  
5.2  
PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63) .......................................5-1  
PLU Price Change with DLL (Submode 73) ....................................................................5-3  
6. INQUIRY ...........................................................................................................6-1  
7. BACKUP FUNCTION .......................................................................................7-1  
8. DATA CAPTURE FUNCITON ..........................................................................8-1  
9. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION .......................................9-1  
10. TRANSMISSION ERROR...............................................................................10-1  
10.1 Cause of Error ...............................................................................................................10-1  
10.2 Error Display ..................................................................................................................10-1  
10.3 Error Canceling Process ................................................................................................10-2  
11. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE........................... 11-1  
11.1 Suspending ....................................................................................................................11-1  
11.2 Retry ..............................................................................................................................11-1  
11.3 Incomplete Ending .........................................................................................................11-1  
11.4 Cancel............................................................................................................................11-1  
EO1-11138  
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE  
1.1 Terminal Open Check  
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE  
Before entering in-line service operations (In-line Report takings, DLLs, etc.), the following operations are  
available if necessary.  
1.1  
Terminal Open Check  
This operation sends a dummy text to those terminals set in the Terminal Connection Table (Submode 69), and  
prints out the Register Nos. of the disconnected terminals (i.e. terminals not responding).  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale (operable on the Master Terminal)  
Mode Lock: X and RTR Declaration ON  
Through the Operator Display  
Select “5 OTHERS”.  
Select “80 T/M OPEN CHK”.  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
OTHERS  
*
*
*
*
RTR  
RTR  
1
2
X
GTX  
80 T/M OPEN CHK  
81 T/M CHK  
3 PROGRAM READ  
4 E-JOURNAL  
5 OTHERS  
82 PRT CHECK  
90 CONSOLI READ  
98 FILE VER CHK  
99 INLINE LOG  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
COMB3  
COMB1  
COMB2  
EJ  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Through the Keyboard  
80 [AT/TL]  
Master Terminal Receipt Print  
When the check result is normal:  
Prints the Report Name only.  
When any error status is found:  
Prints the Register Nos. of the terminals  
not connected properly, as well as the Report Name.  
12-25-1999 SAT  
#3001  
12-25-1999 SAT  
#3001  
************************************************************  
****************************************  
************************************************************  
****************************************  
X80  
#3002  
#3003  
************************************************************  
****************************************  
X80  
************************************************************  
****************************************  
NOT_CONNECT  
NOT_CONNECT  
0176 07:11TM  
0178 07:14TM  
1-1  
EO1-11138  
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE  
1.2 Terminal Designation  
1.2  
Terminal Designation  
This operation can be performed before any in-line service operation. When this operation is skipped, no specific  
terminals are designated, i.e., the in-line service operations will be performed to all the terminals.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale (operable on the Master Terminal)  
Mode Lock: SET, X or Z (depending on the in-line service operations to follow) and RTR  
Declaration ON  
Through the Operator Display (NOTE 2 below)  
Select “1 PROGRAMMING”.  
Select “T/M DESIGN”.  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
*
X
*
RTR  
RTR  
1 PROGRAMMING  
2 PROGRAM READ  
3 PROGRAM DLL  
68 PC COMM  
69 CONNECT REG  
T/M DESIGN  
70 INLINE COMM  
71 PRINTER  
73 PRICE CHG  
77 INLINE ID  
78 LOGO  
TAX TABLE  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
Enter  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Through the Keyboard  
[#]  
|Register No.| [#]  
[AT/TL]  
Enter the Register No. of a  
Terminal which is subject to the in-  
line service operations to follow.  
Repeat for other terminals which are  
subject to the in-line service operation.  
NOTES:  
1. The Terminal Designation once declared by the above operation will be canceled by changing  
the position of the Mode Lock, or by RTR Declaration Cancel, or by turning OFF and ON the  
power of the terminal. The designation is automatically canceled on completion of the operation  
to follow or when a new designation is operated.  
2. You should perform the terminal designation through the operator display only when an in-line  
service operation to follow is that regarding the SET mode. As described in NOTE 1, the mode  
lock change after designating a terminal results in the cancellation of the terminal designation you  
declared.  
ex.) To designate the following terminal.  
Terminal ID No. 4:  
Register No. 3003  
Mode Lock: SET, X or Z (depending on an inline-service operation to follow)/RTR Declaration ON  
[#] 3003 [#] [AT/TL]  
1-2  
EO1-11138  
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE  
1.3 Terminal Condition Check  
Journal Print  
P00  
#04  
T/M DESIGN  
#3003  
0189 09:26TM  
1.3  
Terminal Condition Check  
This operation checks the condition of the designated terminals, and prints out the status responded from the  
terminals.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale (operable on Master Terminal)  
Mode Lock: X and RTR Declaration ON  
Through the Operator Display  
Select “5 OTHERS”.  
Select “81 T/M CHK”.  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
OTHERS  
*
*
*
*
RTR  
RTR  
1
2
X
GTX  
80 T/M OPEN CHK  
81 T/M CHK  
3 PROGRAM READ  
4 E-JOURNAL  
5 OTHERS  
82 PRT CHECK  
90 CONSOLI READ  
98 FILE VER CHK  
99 INLINE LOG  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
COMB3  
COMB1  
COMB2  
EJ  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Through the Keyboard  
81 [AT/TL]  
Master Terminal Receipt Print  
12-25-1999 SAT  
#3001  
************************************************************  
****************************************  
X81  
T/M_CHECK  
#3001  
#3002  
#3003  
OK  
NO RESPONSE  
NO RESPONSE  
Status Symbol  
OK: The terminal condition is normal.  
NO RESPONSE: No response (power-OFF, etc.)  
************************************************************  
****************************************  
0191 09:42TM  
Blank: Other statuses  
1-3  
EO1-11138  
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE  
1.4 Printer Condition Check  
1.4  
Printer Condition Check  
This operation checks the conditions of the printers connected to each terminal.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale (operable on each terminal)  
Mode Lock: X  
Through the Operator Display  
Select “5 OTHERS”.  
Select “82 PRT CHECK”.  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04  
OTHERS  
80 T/M OPEN CHK  
*
*
*
*
RTR  
1
2
X
GTX  
81 T/M CHK  
3 PROGRAM READ  
4 E-JOURNAL  
5 OTHERS  
82 PRT CHECK  
90 CONSOLI READ  
98 FILE VER CHK  
99 INLINE LOG  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
COMB3  
COMB1  
COMB2  
EJ  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Through the Keyboard  
82 [AT/TL]  
Receipt Print  
12-25-1999 SAT  
#3001  
X82  
1
R
J
RKP1  
X_PRT_CHECK  
OK  
OK  
OK  
OK: The printer condition is normal.  
?: Transmission Error  
OFF LINE: No response (power-OFF, etc.)  
0192 10:06TM  
1-4  
EO1-11138  
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS  
2.1 Terminal Reports  
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS  
2.1  
Terminal Reports  
Since most reports are taken as in-line reports on the Master Terminal, some of the reports which are available  
on the individual standalone ECR basis cannot be taken on Master or Satellite ECRs of the in-line system. The  
following are the reports which are listed in the MANAGER’S GUIDE for the standalone level but cannot be taken  
on any ECRs of the in-line system. Other reports not listed below can be taken even in the in-line system. (Before  
taking those reports, however, please read the next section 2.2: In-line Reports.)  
TERMINAL REPORTS that cannot be taken on any ECRs of the in-line system  
DAILY REPORTS  
GT REPORTS  
REPORT NAME  
REPORT NAME  
CASHIER READ AND RESET REPORTS  
(when adopting the Floating Cashier Feature)  
CASHIER GT READ AND RESET REPORTS  
(when adopting the Floating Cashier Feature)  
Individual Cashier Read  
Individual Cashier Reset  
All Cashier Read  
Individual Cashier GT Read  
Individual Cashier GT Reset  
All Cashier GT Read  
All Cashier Reset  
All Cashier GT Reset  
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITH  
SALES READ AND RESET REPORTS  
EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT GT READ  
AND RESET REPORTS  
Individual Cashier Read  
Individual Cashier Reset  
All Cashier Read  
All Cashier Reset  
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITHOUT  
SALES READ REPORTS  
Individual Cashier  
All Cashier  
EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT READ AND  
RESET REPORTS (Daily and Weekly)  
2.2  
In-line Reports  
2.2.1  
In-line Report Command Executions  
Before taking in-line reports, please note the following:  
1) In-line Reset Reports (as well as In-line Read Reports) can be taken on the Master Terminal as long as the  
Satellite Terminals are in the idle status (“Signed OFF”condition in case of the cashier code entry type). To  
check status of all the terminals connected to the in-line loop, Terminal Condition Check can be operated  
(refer to Chapter 1).  
2) When In-line Reports are taken, the power of each Satellite terminal must be turned ON but the Mode Lock  
can be in any position.  
The operation flow for taking In-line Reports is shown on the next page, and the table of In-line Reports is on the  
following pages.  
2-1  
EO1-11138  
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS  
2.2 In-line Reports  
The key operation for each In-line Report is the same as the corresponding terminal report available on the  
standalone ECR. However, the key operation can be executed only on the Master Terminal while the [RTR] key  
is turned on.  
Conditions required on terminals for In-line Report takings:  
Read/Reset Reports (Daily or GT)  
Master Terminal:  
Any time outside a sale  
Satellite Terminals: Signed-OFF condition (Code Entry Method)  
Lock Positions Required:  
Master Terminal:  
Mode Lock: X/RTR Declaration: ON  
Mode Lock: Z/RTR Declaration: ON  
Satellite Terminals: Any positions  
WARNING!  
When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.  
OPERATION FLOW OF IN-LINE READ OR RESET REPORTS  
To be operated on the  
Master Terminal only  
Designating  
All Terminals  
Designating Some Terminals  
[#]  
|Store/Register No.|  
of the terminal to be  
designated (max. 6 digits)  
Repeat for  
all the  
terminals to  
be designated.  
Refer to  
Chapter 1  
[#]  
[AT/TL]  
Report Taking Operation for Each Report (see the following pages).  
Each Terminal s Report Data Collection Process  
Refer to the  
following pages.  
When the option Individual Terminal  
Data Report Issue is selected.  
In other cases  
(applicable to Financial Reports only).  
Each Terminal s  
Data Print (from  
Master Terminal)  
Incomplete Ending:  
Also refer to Retry,  
Suspending, and  
Cancel operations.  
Uncollected  
Terminals  
Refer to  
Chapter 11.  
Store/Register  
No. Print  
Normal Ending  
Consolidated  
Data Report  
End  
2-2  
EO1-11138  
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS  
2.2 In-line Reports  
TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS  
RTR Declaration: ON  
Report Name  
Mode  
Lock  
Key Operation  
COMBINATION REPORTS  
Combination 1 Read:  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
[AT/TL]  
200 [AT/TL]  
Combination 2 Read:  
Combination 3 Read:  
Combination 1 Reset:  
Combination 2 Reset:  
Combination 3 Reset:  
Daily  
GT  
Daily  
GT  
Daily  
GT  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
1 [AT/TL]  
201 [AT/TL]  
2 [AT/TL]  
202 [AT/TL]  
[AT/TL]  
200 [AT/TL]  
1 [AT/TL]  
201 [AT/TL]  
2 [AT/TL]  
Daily  
GT  
202 [AT/TL]  
FINANCIAL REPORTS  
Financial Read:  
Daily  
GT  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
Z
Z
3 [AT/TL]  
203 [AT/TL]  
3 [AT/TL]  
Financial Reset:  
203 [AT/TL]  
CASHIER REPORTS  
(for the Floating Cashier feature)  
Code Entry Method:  
Individual Cashier Read: Daily  
X
X
Z
4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
Start with 204 instead of 4 in the above pattern.  
GT  
Code Entry Method:  
Individual Cashier Reset: Daily  
4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
GT  
Z
X
X
Z
Z
Start with 204 instead of 4 in the above pattern.  
All store All Cashier Read: Daily  
4 [ST]  
204 [ST]  
4 [ST]  
GT  
All store All Cashier Reset: Daily  
GT  
204 [ST]  
CASHIER REPORTS  
(for the Non-Floating Cashier feature only)  
Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Read:  
Daily  
GT  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
Z
Z
4 [ST]  
204 [ST]  
4 [ST]  
Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Reset:  
204 [ST]  
CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES REPORTS  
Credit Card Company Sales Read: Daily  
X
X
Z
Z
6 [AT/TL]  
206 [AT/TL]  
6 [AT/TL]  
GT  
Credit Card Company Sales Reset : Daily  
GT  
206 [AT/TL]  
DEPARTMENT GROUP REPORTS (Read only)  
Department Group Read: Daily  
GT  
X
X
8 [AT/TL]  
208 [AT/TL]  
MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER READ  
(Daily only)  
X
9 [AT/TL]  
(to be continued on next page)  
2-3  
EO1-11138  
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS  
2.2 In-line Reports  
TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS (continued)  
RTR Declaration: ON  
Report Name  
Mode  
Lock  
Key Operation  
HOURLY RANGE REPORTS  
Hourly Read (Daily only)  
Hourly Reset (Daily only)  
X
Z
10 [AT/TL]  
10 [AT/TL]  
DEPARTMENT REPORTS  
All Department Read:  
Daily  
GT  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
Z
Z
11 [AT/TL]  
211 [AT/TL]  
11 [AT/TL]  
211 [AT/TL]  
All Department Reset:  
ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN-  
DRAWER READ (Daily only)  
X
12 [AT/TL]  
PLU REPORTS  
All PLU Read:  
All PLU Reset:  
Zone PLU Read:  
Daily  
GT  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
Z
Z
X
13 [AT/TL]  
213 [AT/TL]  
13 [AT/TL]  
213 [AT/TL]  
Daily  
13 [#] |Zone-start PLU Code|  
[X] |Zone-end PLU Code| [AT/TL]  
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.  
13 [#] |Zone-start PLU Code|  
[X] |Zone-end PLU Code| [AT/TL]  
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.  
(Process Reports; NOTE on page 2-5)  
GT  
Daily  
X
Z
Zone PLU Reset:  
GT  
Daily  
Z
X
Individual PLU Read:  
13 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST]) [AT/TL]  
Repeat for required PLUs.  
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.  
(Process Reports; NOTE on page 2-5)  
13 [#] 0 [AT/TL]  
GT  
X
X
X
X
Inactive PLU Read:  
Daily  
GT  
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.  
PLU STOCK READ REPORTS (Daily only)  
Individual PLU Stock  
X
(Process Reports; NOTE page 2-5)  
14 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU] [AT/TL]  
Repeatable  
Zone PLU Stock  
All PLU Stock  
X
X
14 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]  
| PLU Code |  
14 [AT/TL]  
PLU Code |  
CUSTOMER FILE REPORTS (Daily only)  
Individual File Read  
Zone File Read  
Zone File Reset  
All File Read  
All File Reset  
Inactive File Read  
X
X
Z
X
Z
X
15 [#] |File Code| [X] [AT/TL]  
15 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]  
| File Code |  
File Code |  
15 [AT/TL]  
15 [#] 0 [AT/TL]  
PLU GROUP REPORTS  
PLU Group Read:  
Daily  
GT  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
Z
Z
24 [AT/TL]  
224 [AT/TL]  
24 [AT/TL]  
224 [AT/TL]  
PLU Group Reset:  
(to be continued on next page)  
2-4  
EO1-11138  
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS  
2.2 In-line Reports  
TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS (continued)  
RTR Declaration: ON  
Report Name  
Mode  
Lock  
Key Operation  
DAY PART REPORTS (Daily only)  
Day Part Read  
Day Part Reset  
X
Z
25 [AT/TL]  
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table)  
WITH SALES REPORTS (Daily only)  
Individual Cashier Read  
Individual Cashier Reset  
X
Z
Code Entry Method:  
30 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
Cashier Key Method:  
Depress the required Cashier Key, 30 [AT/TL]  
All Store All Cashier Read  
All Store All Cashier Reset  
X
Z
30 [ST]  
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table)  
WITHOUT SALES READ REPORTS (Daily only)  
Individual Cashier Read  
X
Code Entry Method:  
31 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
Cashier Key Method:  
Depress et the required Cashier Key, 31 [AT/TL]  
31 [ST]  
All Store All Cashier Read  
X
X
COMBO SALE REPORTS (Daily only)  
Individual Combo Read  
43 [#] |Combo Code| [#] ([ST]) [AT/TL]  
Repeatable  
All Combo Read  
All Combo Reset  
All Combo Read (detail)  
All Combo Reset (detail)  
X
Z
X
Z
43 [ST]  
43 [AT/TL]  
HOURLY COMBO SALE REPORTS (Daily only)  
Hourly Combo Sale Read  
Hourly Combo Sale Reset  
X
Z
44 [AT/TL]  
EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT REPORTS  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Read: Daily  
Weekly  
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
47 [AT/TL]  
247 [AT/TL]  
248 [AT/TL]  
47 [AT/TL]  
247 [AT/TL]  
248 [AT/TL]  
GT  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Reset: Daily  
Weekly  
GT  
NOTE: When the “Process Report” is marked, the report can only be taken after taking another report which  
consolidates the corresponding data to be based on. For further details, see the following table and  
descriptions.  
2-5  
EO1-11138  
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS  
2.2 In-line Reports  
PROCESS REPORTS AND BASE REPORT DATA  
The following table shows which process reports are available after which report data collections.  
Reports Collection Required before Process  
Report takings  
(CONSOLIDATION MEMORY CAPTURE: NOTE 1)  
Process Reports available  
Individual PLU Read Daily  
Any of the following PLU reports (NOTE2)  
Inactive PLU Read Daily  
All PLU Read Daily  
Zone PLU Read Daily  
All PLU Reset Daily  
Zone PLU Reset Daily  
Any of the following PLU reports (NOTE2)  
Individual PLU Read GT  
Inactive PLU Read GT  
All PLU Read GT  
Zone PLU Read GT  
All PLU Reset GT  
Zone PLU Reset GT  
Either of the following PLU stock reports (NOTE 2)  
All PLU Stock Read  
Individual PLU Stock Read  
Zone PLU Stock Read  
NOTES:  
1. CONSOLIDATION MEMORY CAPTURE: When an in-line read or reset report is taken on the  
Master Terminal, the consolidated data is automatically stored in the Consolidation Memory of  
the Master Terminal. The consolidated data stored there is not only used as the data for a  
Process Report but also sent to the PC by a command from the PC when a PC is connected.  
However, Consolidation memory capturing of a PLU report and other reports cannot be  
performed at the same time. Only one job for the same Report No. can be captured in the  
Consolidated Memory (A Read and a Reset of the same report is regarded as one job), and it  
always holds the latest consolidated data.  
2. The process reports will be output based on the report data previously collected. For example,  
when an “Inactive PLU Read” report is taken after a “Zone PLU Read”, only the inactive PLUs in  
the designated zone will be printed on the Inactive Read Report.  
2.2.2  
In-line Report Print Format  
IN-LINE REPORT TYPE  
An in-line report can be classified into the following five types.  
1. Collects data from each terminal to print a consolidation result:  
Credit Card Company Sales, Department Group, Hourly Range, All Department, All/Zone PLU, All/Zone  
PLU Stock, PLU Group, Day Part, Combo Sales, Hourly Combo Sales Reports  
2. Collects data from each terminal to print a collection result per terminal:  
Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Report (Non-floating Cashier)  
3. Collects data from each terminal to print a collection result per terminal and then print the consolidation result:  
Financial, Media Sales & In-drawer and All Media Sales Total & Cash-in-drawer Reports  
4. Creates a process data using consolidated data and prints a report:  
Indiv. PLU, Inactive PLU and Indiv. PLU Stock Reports  
5. Prints data in the center file possessed by the master terminal:  
Indiv./All Cashier (Floating Cashier), Guest File, Check Track with/without Sales, Employee Clock-in/  
Clock-out Reports  
2-6  
EO1-11138  
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS  
2.2 IN-LINE REPORTS  
The print format of each report is basically the same as the format of the corresponding standalone terminal  
report except that some indications are additionally printed as in-line operation job IDs.  
12-25-1999 SAT  
#3001  
RTR-Symbol  
Report Name  
****************************************  
(When designating a zone, a zone range is printed.)  
For print items, refer to the similar report described in the Stand-  
alone section.  
#111101  
#222202  
0001Z  
0001Z  
Register No., Reset Count  
(on Reset Report only)  
#999909  
0001Z  
RTR Symbol  
****************************************  
Unfinished register No. and status  
NO RESPONSE: No response  
BUSY: The terminal is busy.  
Blank: Other statuses  
#555505 XXXXXXXXXXXX  
#666606 XXXXXXXXXXXX  
0176 07:11TM  
Consecutive No., Current Time  
Journal Indications on Individual Terminals (when report data is collected)  
Read Report Collection Indication  
X03  
FINANCIAL  
22:30TM  
*
*
Read Operation Descriptor  
Time of Data Collection  
Reset Report Collection Indication  
Time of Data Collection  
Time of Clear Command Reception  
Z03  
= Z03  
FINANCIAL  
FINANCIAL  
22:30TM  
22:30TM =  
*
*
Reset Operation Descriptor  
2-7  
EO1-11138  
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS  
2.3 Operations after In-line report Taking  
2.3  
Operations after In-line report Taking  
The following operations are available after taking in-line reports.  
2.3.1  
Consolidated report Data Read (Reprint)  
This operation issues the report data which is remaining in the Consolidation Memory of the Master Terminal.  
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: Mode Lock: X/RTR Declaration: ON  
90 [AT/TL]  
When no consolidated data is remaining in the memory, this read operation is not possible.  
2.3.2  
Enforced Clear of Hold Condition (on Individual Terminals)  
This can be operated when the HOLD condition on a terminal can by no means be cleared because the terminal  
cannot receive a Clear Command from the Master Terminal for some reason (the Master Terminal becomes  
down, etc. before completion of the reset report data collection).  
OPERATION ON ANY TERMINAL IN HOLD CONDITION: Mode Lock: Z  
9999 [AT/TL]  
On operating this, the HOLD condition is cleared, and allows any key-in operations. However, this operation  
is regarded as an emergency measure to cope with such trouble as the Master Terminal becomes down, etc.  
and thus no other solutions can be chosen, because the sales data memory of those reports can no longer be  
collected by the Master Terminal.  
2-8  
EO1-11138  
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
3.1 Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level  
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
The system should be programmed fully by your local TOSHIBA TEC representative at the time of delivery  
according to the user’s requirements so that daily operations can immediately start. However, some data must be  
added or changed daily or in a longer period. Since the volume of programming contents for the system is too  
large, this chapter and the following two chapters are provided as guide lines of the user’s daily programming and  
maintenance operations. If there are any unclear points or program data other than listed here must be changed  
or added, please contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative. Please also note that some programming  
operations introduced in the Standalone Level are modified or not available on in-line terminals.  
WARNING!  
Never try to access a program item other than those in the following list. If you access it and  
mistakenly change important data, a malfunction may occur on your completed system.  
3.1  
Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level  
The following is the table of programming operations which are introduced in the Manager’s Guide for the  
Standalone Level and can be operated on in-line terminals as well, with the Submode No. and operation  
sequence unchanged. However, on in-line terminals, these are usually operated on the Master Terminal only and  
down-line-loaded (DLLed) to all the Satellite Terminals. Therefore, if any program data is changed, a DLL is  
further necessary to load the new data (after the change) to all the Satellite Terminals (to be described in the next  
chapter).  
PROGRAMMING JOB LIST  
Master: Programming is possible on the master terminal while the RTR declaration is ON.  
Satellite: Programming is possible on the master terminal (while the RTR declaration is OFF), the backup master  
terminal and the satellite terminals.  
O: Available  
Submode  
Programming Job  
Terminal  
No.  
1
Master Satellite  
Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message  
Programming  
O
O
2
3
Cashier Programming  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Department Table Programming  
PLU Table Programming  
4
5
Time Setting or Adjustment  
O
O
6
Date Setting or Adjustment  
7
Hourly Range Setting  
8
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys and Guests  
Non-taxable Limit Amount and Gratuity Rate Setting  
Minor Group Name Programming  
Major Group Name Programming  
Customer File Table Setting  
O
12  
13  
14  
15  
19  
24  
26  
27  
Combination Report Table Programming  
PLU Stock Loading or Changing  
Tare Table and Scale Unit Weight Programming  
PLU Preset-code Key and Display Key Setting  
O
O
O
3-1  
EO1-11138  
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
3.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals  
Submode  
No.  
Programming Job  
PLU Group Name Programming  
Terminal  
Master Satellite  
29  
30  
O
O
RKP Message Programming  
Display Message Programming  
Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key  
Set Menu Table Programming  
Combo Sale Table Programming  
Guest Check Commercial Message Programming  
Day Part Setting  
31  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
35  
42  
43  
45  
46  
50  
Employee Table Setting  
51  
Job Code/Working Hour Setting  
Tender Up Table Setting  
52  
53  
Display Menu Table Setting  
60  
PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing  
Printer Setting  
71  
O
O
O
No  
Sub-  
mode  
% + and % - Preset Rate Setting  
Selective Itemizer Rate Setting  
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting  
Store/Register No. Setting  
O
3.2  
Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals  
3.2.1  
Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69)  
This submode is required for in-line services. Enter the In-line ID No. and the Register No. of each terminal  
(including the Master Terminal) connected to the in-line cable.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON.  
(Use the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet after depressing the [RTR] key on the REG Mode  
Keyboard Sheet.)  
Through the Operator Display  
Select “1 PROGRAMMING”.  
Select “69 CONNECT REG”.  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
*
*
RTR  
PROGRAMMING  
68 PC COMM  
RTR  
T/M DESIGN  
1 PROGRAMMING  
2 PROGRAM READ  
3 PROGRAM DLL  
69 CONNECT REG  
70 INLINE COMM  
71 PRINTER  
73 PRICE CHG  
77 INLINE ID  
78 LOGO  
TAX TABLE  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
Enter  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
3-2  
EO1-11138  
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
3.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals  
Through the Keyboard  
69 [X]  
|In-line ID No.| [ST]  
|Register No.| [#]  
[AT/TL]  
0 to 999999  
(NOTE 2 below)  
1 to 16  
(NOTES 1 & 2 below)  
*
* For sequentially programming  
In-line ID Nos., the In-line ID  
specification can be skipped.  
Repeat for other terminals to be connected, including the Master Terminal  
itself.  
ex.) To set the following.  
Master Terminal  
ID No. 1  
ID No. 3  
Register No. 3001  
Register No. 3002  
Satellite Terminal  
Mode Lock: SET/RTR Declaration is ON.  
69 [X]  
1 [ST] 3001 [#]  
3 [ST] 3002 [#]  
[AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
P69  
#01  
#03  
CONNECT REG  
#
#
3001  
3002  
0196 01:52TM  
NOTES:  
1. In-line ID No.: Master Terminal ............................................1 (fixed)  
Backup Master Terminal (if connected) ........2 (fixed)  
Satellite Terminals.........................................3 to 16 (max. 14 terminals)  
However, a number of the connectable terminals differs depending on your system configuration.  
Refer to the chapter 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION of the Operator’s Guide.  
2. The In-line ID No. and Register No. of each terminal to be set here must be the same as those  
programmed for the terminal in In-line Terminal ID Setting (Submode 77) and Store/Register No.  
Setting (no submode) in Chapter 5 in the Manager’s Guide for stand-alone level.  
3. To delete an individual terminal from the Terminal Connection Table, enter 0 in place of the In-  
line ID No. in the above operation pattern.  
4. To delete the entire Terminal Connection Table once set, operate:  
69 [X] 0 [AT/TL]  
5. If a deleting operation (individual or entire deletion) is performed, the files occupied by the  
deleted terminal(s) (such as Floating Cashier File, etc.) are canceled. Therefore, a deleting  
operation should be performed only when the system is to be re-built or a terminal is to be  
detached from the system.  
3-3  
EO1-11138  
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
3.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals  
3.2.2  
Terminal ID Setting (Submode 77)  
This submode is available for in-line terminals (including the master and backup master terminals) . It must be  
operated separately on each terminal since the Terminal ID should vary from terminal to terminal. The data set in  
this submode is used as the in-line address of the terminal for in-line service operations.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON (for the Master Terminal)  
Mode Lock: SET (for other terminals)  
(Use the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet after depressing the [RTR] key on the REG Mode  
Keyboard Sheet.)  
Through the Operator Display  
Select “1 PROGRAMMING”.  
Select “77 INLINE ID”.  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
*
*
RTR  
PROGRAMMING  
68 PC COMM  
1 PROGRAMMING  
2 PROGRAM READ  
3 PROGRAM DLL  
T/M DESIGN  
69 CONNECT REG  
70 INLINE COMM  
71 PRINTER  
73 PRICE CHG  
77 INLINE ID  
78 LOGO  
TAX TABLE  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
Enter  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Through the Keyboard  
77 [X]  
|Terminal ID No.|  
[AT/TL]  
1: Master  
2: Backup Master  
3 to 16: Satellites  
ex.) To assign Terminal ID No. 4 to a satellite terminal of the in-line system:  
Mode Lock: SET  
77 [X] 4 [AT/TL]  
Journal Print  
12-25-1999 SAT  
INLINE ID  
#3001  
P77  
INLINE ID  
04  
0196 01:52TM  
NOTE: Be certain not to set the same terminal ID No. to terminals on the in-line system.  
If terminals with the same ID No. exist on the in-line system, malfunction may occur.  
3-4  
EO1-11138  
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
3.3 Verification of Programmed Data Related to In-line Specifications  
3.3  
Verification of Programmed Data Related to In-line Specifications  
The programmed data related to in-line specifications can be read for verification purposes.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Anytime outside a sale (Sign OFF required under Cashier Signing Method)  
Mode Lock: X or SET  
(RTR Declaration is unnecessary on the Master Terminal.)  
Terminal Connection Table.................169 [AT/TL]  
Terminal ID Setting .............................177 [AT/TL]  
NOTES:  
1. Verifications listed in the Manager’s Guide of the standalone level are also available on all the  
terminals of the in-line system.  
2. The verification of Terminal Connection Table can be executed on the Satellite Terminals after  
the DLL operation.  
3-5  
EO1-11138  
4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS  
4.1 DLL Job List  
4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS  
In an in-line system (Master-Satellite system), most programming data are set on the Master Terminal and down-  
line-loaded (DLL) to the Satellite Terminals. The DLL operations introduced in this chapter are pure DLLs, i.e.  
merely loading the data programmed in the Master Terminal to Satellite Terminals. DLLs automatically performed  
with programmed data changes are introduced in the next chapter. If any other DLLs not introduced in this and  
next chapters are required, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative. Please also note that Terminal Designation  
(see Chapter 1) can be operated prior to a specific DLL operation, to designate Satellite Terminals that receive  
the DLL.  
WARNING!  
Never try to perform a DLL operation other than those in the following list. If you perform it and  
mistakenly change important data, a malfunction may occur on your completed system.  
4.1  
DLL Job List  
Submode  
No.  
DLL Job  
Remarks  
501  
Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message  
Programming  
502  
Cashier Programming  
NOTE on the  
next page  
503  
504  
505  
507  
508  
512  
513  
514  
519  
526  
527  
529  
530  
531  
535  
542  
543  
545  
546  
552  
553  
569  
500  
Department Table Programming  
PLU Table Programming  
Time/Date Setting  
Hourly Range Setting  
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys and Guests  
Non-taxable Limit Amount and Gratuity Rate Setting  
Minor Group Name Programming  
Major Group Name Programming  
Combination Report Table Programming  
Tare Table and Scale Unit Weight Programming  
PLU Preset-code Key and Display Key Setting  
PLU Group Name Programming  
RKP Message Programming  
Display Message Programming  
Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key  
Set Menu Table Programming  
Combo Sale Table Programming  
Guest Check Commercial Message Programming  
Day Part Setting  
Tender Up Table Setting  
Display Menu Table Setting  
Terminal Connection Table Setting  
%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting  
Selective Itemizer Rate Setting  
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting  
4-1  
EO1-11138  
4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS  
4.2 Print Format of DLL Operations  
NOTE: DLL is possible only when the non-floating cashier feature is used.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Terminals including the Master: Any time outside a sale  
(Sign OFF condition is necessary for the Code Entry Method)  
Satellite Terminals: Any position if the power is ON  
Master Terminal:  
Mode Lock: SET  
RTR Declaration: ON  
Through the Operator Display  
Select “3 PROGRAM DLL”.  
Select a DLL item you want to perform.  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
*
*
RTR  
PROGRAM DLL  
590 ALL DLL  
591 ALL DLL2  
500 MISC  
501 STORE NAME  
502 CASHIER  
503 DEPARTMENT  
504 PLU  
RTR  
1 PROGRAMMING  
2 PROGRAM READ  
3 PROGRAM DLL  
507 HOURLY  
508 AMOUNT LIMIT  
509 FINANCIAL  
510 PRINT L NAME  
511 SYSTEM OP2  
512 CA TAX & TIP  
513 MINOR GROUP  
514 MAJOR  
505 TIME/DATE  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
Please select operation and Enter key.  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
Enter  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
Through the Keyboard  
|X X X|  
[AT/TL]  
Submode No.  
4.2  
Print Format of DLL Operations  
Master Terminal Receipt  
Satellite Terminal Journal  
P504  
PLU  
22:30TM  
*
*
12-25-1999 SAT  
#3001  
****************************************  
P504  
****************************************  
PLU  
Time of receiving the  
DLL  
0176 07:11TM  
4-2  
EO1-11138  
5. PLU MAINTENANCE  
5.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63)  
5. PLU MAINTENANCE  
In this chapter, adding, changing, or deleting operations related to PLU Table program data are described. These  
are operated on the Master Terminal only. All of these operations are loaded into Satellite Terminals at the same  
time.  
5.1  
PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63)  
This submode can be operated only on the Master Terminal in an in-line system. This submode allows additions/  
changes/deletions of PLUs in the PLU Table File (generated by Submode 4 in the Manager’s Guide for stand-  
alone level). The data entered in this submode is immediately loaded into Satellite Terminals, item by item.  
Programming or Changing  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
All the terminals:  
Anytime outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON  
(Use the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet after depressing the [RTR] key on the REG Mode  
Keyboard Sheet.)  
Through the Operator Display  
Select “63 PLU ADD/CHG” from  
the program menu screen.  
Select “1 PROGRAMMING”.  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
SET  
02-06-1999 03:04  
*
*
*
*
RTR  
PROGRAMMING  
35 LIMIT TABLE  
RTR  
↑↓  
1 PROGRAMMING  
2 PROGRAM READ  
3 PROGRAM DLL  
48 CUR ROUND1  
49 CUR ROUND2  
50 EMPLOYEE  
51 JOB CODE  
52 TENDER UP  
53 MENU TABLE  
60 PRICE  
38 DRAWER WNG  
39 REPORT NAME  
42 SET MENU  
43 COMBO  
44 SLIP PRINT  
45 INVO CM MSG  
46 DAY PART  
63 PLU ADD/CHG  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
Please select operation by Enter key.  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
Enter  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Pg up  
Pg dw  
Enter  
5-1  
EO1-11138  
5. PLU MAINTENANCE  
5.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63)  
Through the Keyboard  
63 [X]  
|Address Nos| [#]  
|PLU Code|  
[PLU]  
for sequential-coded item only  
Submode No.  
Address 1: Link Department  
|Department Code| [#]  
(1 to 99)  
1 [ST]  
Address 2: PLU Name  
Character Entries [ST]  
max. 16 characters  
2 [ST]  
Operation  
procedure  
surrounded  
by this line  
is the same  
as the  
operation in  
Submode 4.  
Address 3: 1st Preset Price  
|Price| [#]  
(max. 6 digits)  
3 [ST]  
Address 4: 2nd Preset Price  
Repeat for any  
|Price| [#]  
(max. 6 digits)  
address within  
the same PLU  
by re-entry for  
correction.  
4 [ST]  
Address 5: 3rd Preset Price  
|Price| [#]  
(max. 6 digits)  
5 [ST]  
Address 6: 4th Preset Price  
Repeat for  
other  
|Price| [#]  
(max. 6 digits)  
6 [ST]  
PLUs.  
Address 7: 5th Preset Price  
|Price| [#]  
(max. 6 digits)  
7 [ST]  
Address 8: PLU Status 1  
|Status Code to ON| [#]  
8 [ST]  
Address 9: PLU Status 2  
|Status Code to ON| [#]  
9 [ST]  
Address 10: Tax Status  
|Tax Code| [#]  
10 [ST]  
Address 11: PLU Group  
|PLU Group Code| [#]  
11 [ST]  
(1 to 99)  
Address 12: Set Menu Table  
|Set Menu Table No.| [#]  
12 [ST]  
(1 to 50)  
Address 13: Display Menu Table  
|Display Menu Table No.| [#]  
13 [ST]  
(max. 10 digits)  
Address 14: Stock Quantity  
|Stock Quantity| [#]  
14 [ST]  
(0 to 9999.99)  
Address 15: Minimum Stock Quantity  
|Minimum Stock Quantity| [#]  
15 [ST]  
(0 to 9999.99)  
Address 16: Takeout Tax Status  
|Tax Code| [#]  
(max. 4 digits)  
16 [ST]  
Address 17: Tare Table  
|Tare Table No.| [#]  
17 [ST]  
1 to 9  
Address 18: Unit Weight  
|Unit Weight Table| [#]  
18 [ST]  
1 to 11  
[ST]  
[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)  
Executes DLL.  
5-2  
EO1-11138  
5. PLU MAINTENANCE  
5.2 PLU Price Change with DLL (Submode 73)  
Deletion  
CONDITION  
The sales data of the required PLUs are zero and all terminals are outside a sale,  
programming, or report taking operations.  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON  
63 [X]  
[ITEM CORR]  
|PLU Code| [PLU]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted.  
NOTES:  
1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, the master terminal sends each  
satellite terminal (or the designated satellite terminals) the DLL start command to make it “HOLD”  
condition. And then, the master terminal sends the DLL data to each terminal. After the DLL is  
completed, the master terminal sends each terminal the DLL end command to release it from  
“HOLD” condition. However, a program option allows you to perform a DLL operation even while  
each terminal is not in idle status.  
2. A maximum of 100 PLU tables can be added or changed in one DLL operation sequence.  
5.2  
PLU Price Change with DLL (Submode 73)  
This DLL operation is used to change a PLU price on each price level, and send the data to each satellite terminals.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite  
Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON  
Repeatable for other PLUs  
73 [X]  
|PLU Code| [PLU]  
Max. 6 digits  
[PLU Preset-code Key]  
[MENU 1 to 5]  
|Price Level| [ST]  
|New Preset Price| [#]  
[AT/TL]  
1 to 5  
Max. 6 digits  
Repeatable for a price change of another price level. When you  
change the price of each price level in numerical order, the price level  
designation can be skipped.  
NOTES:  
1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, the master terminal sends each satellite terminal  
(orthedesignatedsatelliteterminals)theDLLstartcommandtomakeitHOLDcondition.Andthen,themaster  
terminal sends the DLL data to each terminal. After the DLL is completed, the master terminal sends each  
terminal the DLL end command to release it from “HOLD” condition. However, a program option allows you  
to perform a DLL operation even while each terminal is not in idle status.  
2. A maximum of 100 PLU prices can be changed in one DLL operation sequence.  
3. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the PLU is set with a zero price. When the  
New Preset Price entry is skipped and the [#] is simply depressed, it will be an open-price PLU.  
5-3  
EO1-11138  
6. INQUIRY  
6. INQUIRY  
6. INQUIRY  
In the master-satellite system, the data files regarding the following inquiries between the master terminal and  
each satellite terminal are maintained in the master terminal center file. Each time an item regarding the data files  
are performed on each satellite terminal, the master terminal searches and checks the corresponding file and  
responds to the inquiring terminal by sending a result. Also, when an item is finalized on the satellite terminal, the  
master terminal will update the data file regarding the item.  
Cashier Occupy and Cancel Inquiry (Floating Cashier Feature)  
Check Track (Guest Order Table) Occupy and Cancel Inquiry  
Customer File (Regular Customer and New Customer) Inquiry  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Occupy and Cancel Inquiry  
Cashier Change Occupy and Cancel  
Receipt and Journal Print Data Transmission  
RKP Print Data Transmission  
Printer Status Check  
6-1  
EO1-11138  
7. BACKUP FUNCTION  
7. BACKUP FUNCTION  
7. BACKUP FUNCTION  
(ONLY WHEN THE BACKUP MASTER IS CONNECTED)  
(1) Function  
By connecting the backup master terminal (BM) , the various files stored in the master terminal (M) can  
be backed up.  
The terminal assigned to ID No. 2 will function as a backup master terminal (BM) . By programming ID  
No. 2 in the terminal connection table and downloading this data to each terminal, the system will  
function as a system in which the backup master terminal (BM) is connected.  
By changing terminal ID from 2 to 1, the backup master terminal (BM) will function as the master  
terminal (M).  
<Files to be Backed Up>  
Cashier Table  
(When the floating cashier system is used)  
Program data  
Sales data  
Check Track (Guest Order) Table  
Item Buffer  
Sales data  
Sales data  
Program data  
PC Transmission Information Table  
Employee Table  
Program data  
Sales data  
Job Code/Working Hour Table  
Customer File Table  
Program data  
Program data  
Sales data  
NOTE: Data capture (DC) transaction files are not backed up.  
Sales data is backed up on a real-time basis.  
When sales data of the master terminal (M) is updated, sales data of the backup master terminal (BM)  
is updated at the same time.  
Backup data check function:  
Correspondence between the center files and backup data is checked every certain period of time.  
Backup data update process:  
When an error occurs in backup data, the following processing methods can be selected according to  
the program option setting.  
(1)  
Automatic data copy  
When the version of the center file stored in the master terminal (M) is different from that stored  
in the backup master terminal (BM) , registration jobs are automatically prohibited, the backup  
data is properly exchanged.  
While updating the backup data, each inquiry from the terminals may result in a “MASTER IS  
BUSY” error.  
(2)  
Manual data copy  
When the version of the center file stored in the master terminal (M) is different from that of data  
stored in the backup master terminal (BM) , the master terminal (M) gives a short beep at the  
timing of issuing the long receipt to warn that the data is not backed up properly.  
The operator should update the backup data manually.  
7-1  
EO1-11138  
7. BACKUP FUNCTION  
7. BACKUP FUNCTION  
(2) Procedure  
1) Changing Program Data (DLL from the PC)  
DLL data  
Backup data  
Response  
BM  
M
PC  
Response  
When various center files from the PC are received via DLL, the master terminal (M) backs up program  
data and sales data of the backup master terminal (BM) automatically and sends the result to the PC.  
2) Changing Program Data (Operated on the Master Terminal)  
Programming  
Operation  
M
When various center files are being programmed on the master terminal (M) , the backup error flag of  
the relevant file is turned on. (At this time, backup data is not updated.)  
*
*
For details about the backup error flag, refer to 5) Backup Error Flag.  
For an explanation of the backup data update process, refer to 6) Backup Data Update Process.  
3) Updating Sales Data  
After each satellite terminal sends an affect data of which sales data is subject to the data backup to the  
master terminal, the same data is sent to the backup master terminal and the sales data is updated.  
4) Checking Backup Data  
Version request  
Version data  
BM  
M
The master terminal (M) sends the version request command to the backup master terminal (BM) every  
certain period of time and receives version information about the backup data.  
The master terminal (M) checks correspondence between the version information received from the  
backup master terminal (BM) and the center files (stored in the M) . If an abnormality is found, the  
backup error flag is turned on.  
When a master job is being performed on the master terminal (M) ([RTR] key turned on), or a PC job is  
being performed backup data is not checked.  
5) Backup Error Flag  
When there is any difference between the data stored in the master terminal (M) and the backup data  
stored in the backup master terminal (BM), the master terminal (M) turns on the backup error flag of the  
file in which a difference was found.  
There are the following five cases when the backup error flag is turned on.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
The master terminal (M) changes the programming of the center files.  
A version error is found at the backup data check.  
The backup job fails after the center file has been downloaded from the PC.  
Updating of the backup data fails after the center files have been reset.  
Updating of the backup data fails after the center file (containing Read counter) has been read.  
The backup master terminal (ID No. 2) is added to the terminal connection table.  
7-2  
EO1-11138  
7. BACKUP FUNCTION  
7. BACKUP FUNCTION  
While the backup error flag is on, the following operation is performed.  
The master terminal (M) gives a short beep at the timing when the long receipt is printed to warn  
that a backup error has occurred.  
There are two timings cases the backup error flag is turned off.  
1
2
The backup data is properly backed up according to the backup data update process.  
The backup master terminal (ID No. 2) is deleted from the terminal connection table.  
6) Backup Data Update Process  
(This is a process required when the backup data stored in the backup master terminal (BM) is not  
updated properly due to an error.)  
Backup data  
BM  
M
Response  
The method for processing the backup error is selected according to a program option setting. Even if  
the automatic data copy operation is selected, data copy can also be performed manually.  
1
Automatic data copy  
When the backup error flag is on (or turned on) , the master terminal (M) automatically sends to  
the backup master terminal (BM) the file in which the error has occurred, and updates the backup  
data.  
2
Manual data copy  
The backup data is updated by the manual operations of the operator.  
*
*
*
*
When the backup data is being updated, inquiries from terminals may result in a “MASTER IS BUSY”  
error.  
When a “MASTER IS BUSY” error occurs, clear the error using the [C] key. Then, update the backup  
data again after the master job (backup process) is complete.  
Only the files with the backup error flag turned on are sent to the backup master terminal (BM) to  
update the backup data.  
When the master job is being done on the master terminal (M) ([RTR] key is turned on), backup data is  
not checked or updated.  
7) Manual Copy of Backup Data  
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: Mode Lock Z/RTR Declaration ON  
900 [AT/TL]  
7-3  
EO1-11138  
8. DATA CAPTURE FUNCITON  
9. DATA CAPTURE FUNCITON  
8. DATA CAPTURE FUNCTION  
(1) Function  
To make it possible to transfer data to the PC, the details of registration jobs performed on each terminal  
are pooled in the master terminal (M) as transaction data.  
(2) Buffering Transaction Data  
When a terminal performs the finalize operation,transaction data entered in registrations is sent to the  
master terminal (M). The master terminal (M) receives the transaction data and pools it in the transaction  
buffer.  
The transaction data is controlled usually in two buffers. One is for buffering transaction data and the other  
is for collecting data from the PC. (When one buffer becomes full, or when the collection request is issued  
from the PC, the buffer in use is released for the PC, and the other buffer is used for subsequent  
buffering.)  
(3) Collecting Transaction Data  
The transaction data stored in the master terminal is sent to the PC according to the request from the PC.  
If the buffer becomes full when the master terminal receives the transaction data request command from  
the PC, the transaction data of the full buffer is sent to the PC. If the buffer is not full,the transaction data in  
the buffer (the buffer used for buffering) is sent to the PC.  
(4) Processing when the Transaction Buffer is Full  
When transaction data is received from the terminal (BM, S), the master terminal checks the vacant area of  
the transaction buffer. If the received transaction data cannot be stored in the buffer, the master terminal  
sends to the terminal a response indicating that the buffer is full. The terminal receiving this response,  
performs journal printing indicating that the transaction data is missing.  
(5) Supplementary  
Only when the transaction data capture function is selected by program option, transaction data can be  
sent/received and buffered.  
There is no warning reporting the remaining capacity of the transaction buffer.  
Once the transaction data collection command is issued,data in one buffer is collected.  
(When data in two buffers is required,this command should be issued twice.)  
8-1  
EO1-11138  
9. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION  
10. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION  
9. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION  
The Backup Master Terminal can be changed to be used as the Master Terminal for an accident that the Master  
Terminal becomes down, etc. And the Master Terminal can be changed to be used as the Backup Master when it  
comes back from repair, etc.  
To switch from the Backup Master Terminal function to the Master Terminal function:  
1 Disconnect the master terminal from the line.  
2 When other terminals are in registration operation, finalize and cashier sign-off, or Cashier Key to OFF  
operations should be performed.  
Since a transmission error occurs at this time, an inquiry job should be completed.  
3 Change the backup master terminal address from 2 (BM) to 1 (M). (Therefore, the backup master terminal will  
function as the master terminal.)  
Refer to Terminal ID Setting (Submode 77) on Chapter 3.  
4 Delete the backup master terminal from the terminal connection table on the master terminal.  
(Reprogramming is required.)  
Refer to Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69) on Chapter 3.  
5 Download the terminal connection table.  
The following files are guaranteed when the recovery process is performed. If a file is used in another terminal  
when the master terminal goes down, however, data stored in the terminal is not guaranteed.  
Files controlled in the master terminal (cashier file, etc.)  
PC transmission information  
The following files and data are lost when the master terminal goes down.  
Transaction file for data capture  
Files controlled locally on the master terminal  
Data in the files which are used by other terminals when the master terminal goes down.  
9-1  
EO1-11138  
10. TRANSMISSION ERROR  
10.1 Cause of Error  
10. TRANSMISSION ERROR  
When a terminal makes an inquiry but a communication error occurs for some reason and the inquiry to the other  
station is not possible, the message “IRC CONNECT ERR” is displayed on that terminal and operation is  
stopped.  
When the Master Terminal cannot access the inquiring file because the Master Terminal is receiving DLL data,  
the backup data is being updated between the Master and the Backup Master terminals, etc., the message  
“MASTER IS BUSY” is displayed and operation is stopped.  
10.1 Cause of Error  
10.1.1 “IRC CONNECT ERR”  
a) Communication with the other station is not possible due to a connection error (cable cut, Master  
Terminal’s Power-OFF, etc.).  
b) Comminication was made, but due to a text error, the other station cannot recognize it correctly.  
10.1.2 “MASTER IS BUSY”  
Cannot access the inquiring file due to the following causes:  
a) The Master Terminal is receiving DLL data from the PC.  
b) Programming operations are under way on the Master Terminal.  
c) Backup data updating process is under way.  
10.2 Error Display  
IRC CONNECT ERR  
MASTER IS BUSY  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
REG  
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
P1S1  
*
*
*
*
IRC CONNECT ERR 01  
MASTER IS BUSY  
Terminal ID of the other station  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
0.00  
DISP5  
TOTAL  
DISP3  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP1  
DISP2  
DISP4  
DISP5  
NOTE: Depressing the [C] key cancels the error status.  
10-1  
EO1-11138  
10. TRANSMISSION ERROR  
10.3 ERROR CANCELING PROCESS  
10.3 Error Canceling Process  
There are two error-canceling processes in accordance with the inquiring job contents.  
Type 1: Depressing the [C] key will return to the status before the inquiry.  
Applicable Jobs:  
Check Track Occupy Declaration  
Check Track Sale Item Entry Inquiry  
Cashier Occupy Inquiry  
Guest Table Inquiry  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Occupy Inquiry  
Cashier Change Occupy Inquiry  
Type 2: Depressing the [C] key will cancel the error status, displays the following message, and waits for  
RETRY or CANCEL.  
Applicable Jobs:  
Check Track Affect  
Check Track Table Clear  
Check Track Occupy Cancel  
Cashier Affect  
Cashier Cancel Inquiry  
Guest Table Affect  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Affect  
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Cancel Inquiry  
Cashier Change Affect  
Transaction Data Send  
REG 02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi  
*
*
P1S1  
RETRY?  
Please input AT/TL key.  
TOTAL  
0.00  
0.00  
DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5  
For Retry................... [AT/TL] (Performs re-sending to the other station.)  
For Cancel ................ [X] [ST] (Stops the inquiry, printing on journal “ X ST ”)  
** **  
NOTE: The “Cancel” in Type 2 above is only for the case that the other station is in trouble which cannot be  
recovered by a Retry operation.  
10-2  
EO1-11138  
11. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE  
11.1 Suspending  
11. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE  
The following are other operations relating to in-line service operations.  
11.1 Suspending  
This is to be operated for the purpose of suspending an in-line service being executed, when any terminals remain  
unserviced, and of going on to a “RETRY”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CANCEL” operation as the next step.  
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)  
Depress [ITEM CORR] until the key-in tone is generated.  
DESCRIPTION:  
The SUSPENDING operation is allowed any time during an in-line service procedure.  
If suspending by the [ITEM CORR] key is accepted, the Master terminal’s display indicates the number of  
unserviced terminals. (SUSPENDING of a service execution of one terminal is not possible). Now a “RETRY” or  
“INCOMPLETE ENDING” operation can be selected as the next step. (When no key-in operations are made in  
about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, a RETRY process will automatically be executed.)  
11.2 Retry  
This is to be operated for the purpose of re-attempting the in-line service that has been stopped due to “TIME  
OUT” or that has just been suspended by “SUSPENDING” operation.  
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)  
Depress [AT/TL].  
DESCRIPTION:  
The in-line service will again be attempted to the unserviced terminals. This operation is possible any number  
of times after a “TIME OUT” condition or a “SUSPENDING” operation as long as any terminals remain  
unserviced. (When no key-in operations are made in about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, a  
RETRY process will automatically be executed.)  
11.3 Incomplete Ending  
This is to be operated to abandon services to unserviced terminals, and ends the in-line service with the services  
to service-completed terminals only.  
OPERATION MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)  
Depress [NS].  
DESCRIPTION:  
If an in-line service being executed does not seem to end normally due perhaps to some abnormal status of  
any Satellite Terminals after “TIME OUT”, “SUSPENDING”, and/or “RETRY” operations, the [NS] key can be  
depressed to end the in-line service with only the service-completed terminals serviced and the unserviced  
terminals remaining unserviced. In case of In-line X or Z Report Collection sequences, reports of only the  
service-completed terminals will be issued.  
11.4 Cancel  
This can be operated when a SUSPENDING condition arises due to a TIME OUT or a SUSPENDING operation.  
The entire in-line service being performed is canceled. This operation is effective to in-line read report operations  
but not to any in-line reset report operations.  
OPERATION MASTER TERMINAL: (Mode Lock: X)  
Depress [X].  
11-1  
TEC  

White Rodgers TW2000 User Manual
Sony LMD 1950MD User Manual
Sony HVR Z1U User Manual
Sony HANDYCAM HDR HC7 User Manual
Sony DSR 370 User Manual
Sony CFD E55L User Manual
Simrad Navico Boating Equipment RGC12 User Manual
Samsung VP D323(i) User Manual
Samsung SMX F43RN User Manual
Samsung SC MX10P User Manual